System Release 9.

1
DIMETRA™
DIMETRA X Core

System Overview

OCTOBER 2019
*MN005775A01*
© 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN005775A01-A
MN005775A01-A
Copyrights

Copyrights
The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola
Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola
Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted
Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this
document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of
Motorola Solutions.
© 2019 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated
into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written
permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly
or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent
applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that
arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Disclaimer
Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be
applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of
a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola
Solutions contact for further information.

Trademarks
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other
trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

directive

The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have
the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases).
As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users
in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household
waste.
Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or
service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country.

2
 MN005775A01-A
CMM Labeling and Disclosure Table

CMM Labeling and Disclosure Table

The People’s Republic of China requires that our products comply with China Management Methods
(CMM) environmental regulations. (China Management Methods refers to the Regulation Management
Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products.) Two items are used to
demonstrate compliance; the Label and the Disclosure Table.
The label is placed in a customer visible position on the product. The first of the following examples
means that the product contains no hazardous substances; the second means that the product
contains hazardous substances, and has an Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) of fifty years.

The Environmental Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is the period (in years) during which the Toxic and
Hazardous Substances contained in the Electronic Information Product (EIP) will not leak or mutate
causing environmental pollution, or bodily injury from the use of the EIP.
The Disclosure Table, printed in simplified Chinese, is included with each customer order. An example
of a Disclosure Table (in Chinese) follows:

3
MN005775A01-A
Service Information

Service Information
EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO)
The EMEA Technical Support Operations (TSO) provides a remote Technical Support Service to help
customers resolve technical issues and quickly restore networks and systems. This team of highly
skilled professionals is available to customers with current service agreements in place that include the
Technical Support Service. The TSO technical experts may be accessed through the Service Desk
either electronically or using the listed telephone numbers. If you are unsure whether your current
service agreement entitles you to benefit from this service, or if you would like more information about
the Technical Support Service, contact your local customer support or account manager for further
information.

Contact Details
Technical Requests: [email protected]
Repair Support: [email protected]
Website: https://www.motorolasolutions.com/contactus

Table 1: List of Telephone Numbers

Country In Country Number to Dial

AUSTRIA 0800 281 195
DENMARK 80 253 546
FRANCE 0800 914 532 or +33 176 775 609
GERMANY 0800 724 6872 or +49 69 22221568
ISRAEL 180 931 5818
ITALY 800 791 276
NETHERLANDS 0800 0249 893
NORWAY 800 14 802
POLAND 00800 1215 772
RUSSIA 810 800 286 15011
SAUDI ARABIA 800 811 0523
SOUTH AFRICA 0800 994 886
SPAIN 9009 416 84
UNITED KINGDOM 0800 731 3496 or +44 207 019 0461
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES 8000 3570 4387
All Other Countries +44 207 019 0461

Parts Identification and Ordering

If you need help in identifying non-referenced spare parts, direct a request to the Customer Care
Organization of a local area Motorola Solutions representative. Orders for replacement parts, kits, and
assemblies should be placed directly at the local distribution organization of Motorola Solutions or
through the Extranet site Motorola Online at https://emeaonline.motorolasolutions.com.

4
 MN005775A01-A
Service Information

Updated Versions of Manuals

Verify the current version of the manual at our Extranet site, Motorola Online: https://
emeaonline.motorolasolutions.com.

Your Input
Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to
[email protected].

5
MN005775A01-A
Document History

Document History
Version Description Date
MN005775A01-A Initial version of the System Overview manual. October 2019

6
 MN005775A01-A
Contents

Contents
Copyrights................................................................................................................... 2
CMM Labeling and Disclosure Table.........................................................................3
Service Information.....................................................................................................4
Document History....................................................................................................... 6
List of Figures............................................................................................................13
List of Tables............................................................................................................. 15
List of Processes...................................................................................................... 16
About System Overview........................................................................................... 17
What is Covered In This Manual..................................................................................................17
Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 17
Related Information..................................................................................................................... 17
Icon Conventions...................................................................................................... 18
Style Conventions.....................................................................................................19
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts........................................................................ 20
1.1 What is a Radio System?...................................................................................................... 20
1.1.1 Basic System Components......................................................................................20
1.1.1.1 Radio System Equipment...........................................................................21
1.1.1.2 Radio System Range................................................................................. 21
1.1.2 Communication Types............................................................................................. 22
1.1.3 Call Types Overview................................................................................................ 23
1.1.4 Types of Communication Channels......................................................................... 23
1.1.5 Basic Site Components............................................................................................24
1.1.6 Radios......................................................................................................................25
1.1.7 Call Processing Basics............................................................................................ 25
1.1.7.1 Trunked and Conventional Radio Systems................................................26
1.1.7.2 Radio System Users.................................................................................. 26
1.1.8 Tracing a Basic Call................................................................................................. 27
1.2 Multiple Site Trunked Systems.............................................................................................. 29
1.3 Multizone Systems.................................................................................................................31
1.3.1 Conditions for Multizone Communication................................................................ 31
1.3.1.1 Home Zone Mapping..................................................................................32
1.3.1.2 Controlling Zone.........................................................................................33
1.3.1.3 Participating Zone...................................................................................... 33
1.3.1.4 Modes of Operation....................................................................................33
1.3.2 Interzone Group Service Availability........................................................................ 34

7
MN005775A01-A
Contents

Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology.............................................................. 35

2.1 Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA).......................................................................................35
2.1.1 Spectrum Management............................................................................................35
2.1.2 Pi/4-DQPSK Modulation.......................................................................................... 36
2.1.3 ACELP Voice Compression..................................................................................... 36
2.1.4 Time Division Multiple Access................................................................................. 37
2.2 Network Technology.............................................................................................................. 38
2.2.1 Local Area Network..................................................................................................38
2.2.2 Wide Area Network.................................................................................................. 40
2.2.3 Multi-LAN Sharing....................................................................................................41
2.2.4 Cooperative WAN Routing (CWR) ..........................................................................42
2.2.4.1 Satellite Link Based WAN Connectivity......................................................42
2.2.5 Ethernet Site Links...................................................................................................43
2.2.6 Satellite Links...........................................................................................................44
2.3 Digital Motorola Enhanced Trunked Radio (DIMETRA)........................................................ 44
2.3.1 DIMETRA System Components.............................................................................. 45
2.3.2 DIMETRA System Core........................................................................................... 45
2.3.3 Unicast Routing........................................................................................................45
2.3.4 Multicast Routing..................................................................................................... 46
2.3.5 Call Model................................................................................................................ 47
2.3.6 Traffic Planes........................................................................................................... 49
2.3.7 Cluster and Multicluster Architecture....................................................................... 50
2.4 End-to-End Secure Communication...................................................................................... 50
2.5 Motorola Inter-System Interface............................................................................................ 52
2.6 System Summary.................................................................................................................. 52
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components............................................................ 54
3.1 Mobile Switching Office (MSO)..............................................................................................54
3.1.1 System Server......................................................................................................... 54
3.1.1.1 Types of the System Server.......................................................................54
3.1.2 Zone Controller........................................................................................................ 55
3.1.3 Network Management Subsystem........................................................................... 56
3.1.3.1 Network Management Servers...................................................................58
3.1.3.2 Operations Support Systems..................................................................... 58
3.1.4 Data Subsystem.......................................................................................................61
3.1.4.1 Data Gateway............................................................................................ 62
3.1.5 Telephone Interconnect Subsystem........................................................................ 63
3.1.6 Enhanced Authentication Centre............................................................................. 65
3.1.7 MultiCADI Server..................................................................................................... 66
3.1.8 Alias Server..............................................................................................................67

8
 MN005775A01-A
Contents

3.1.9 Network Security Subsystem................................................................................... 67

3.1.9.1 Core Security Management Server............................................................69
3.1.9.2 Customer Enterprise Network Interface Barrier......................................... 70
3.1.9.3 Firewall.......................................................................................................70
3.1.10 Network Time Server (NTS)...................................................................................71
3.1.11 Terminal Server..................................................................................................... 71
3.2 Network Transport Subsystem.............................................................................................. 71
3.2.1 Routers.................................................................................................................... 73
3.3 Remote Sites......................................................................................................................... 75
3.3.1 Base Transceiver Station (BTS).............................................................................. 75
3.3.2 Control Sites............................................................................................................ 82
3.3.2.1 Types of Control Site..................................................................................83
3.3.2.2 Dispatch Subsystem.................................................................................. 86
3.4 Radios....................................................................................................................................94
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management................................................................. 95
4.1 Radio System Databases...................................................................................................... 95
4.1.1 Call Processing Information..................................................................................... 95
4.1.2 Fault Management Information................................................................................ 96
4.1.3 Statistical Data......................................................................................................... 97
4.1.4 Database Summary................................................................................................. 97
4.1.5 Hierarchical View..................................................................................................... 98
4.1.6 Application Server Interaction.................................................................................. 99
4.2 Server Failure Impacts.........................................................................................................101
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing................................................................... 104
5.1 Configuration Information.................................................................................................... 104
5.1.1 Static User Configuration....................................................................................... 104
5.1.1.1 Default Records....................................................................................... 105
5.1.1.2 Identification Numbers............................................................................. 105
5.1.1.3 Home Zones.............................................................................................106
5.1.1.4 Radio Identification...................................................................................106
5.1.1.5 Radio User............................................................................................... 107
5.1.1.6 Profiles..................................................................................................... 107
5.1.1.7 Templates................................................................................................ 108
5.1.1.8 Configuration Updates............................................................................. 108
5.1.1.9 Talkgroup................................................................................................. 108
5.1.1.10 Object Group..........................................................................................109
5.1.1.11 Barring of Incoming/Outgoing Calls....................................................... 109
5.1.1.12 Multigroup.............................................................................................. 109
5.1.2 Infrastructure Configuration................................................................................... 109

9
MN005775A01-A
Contents

5.1.2.1 Source Site Adjacent Control Channel.....................................................110

5.2 Mobility Management...........................................................................................................110
5.2.1 Mobility as Viewed by the Radio............................................................................ 110
5.2.2 Mobility as Viewed by the Fixed Network Equipment............................................ 111
5.2.3 How the Location Registers are Created............................................................... 111
5.3 Call Processing....................................................................................................................113
5.3.1 Controlling Zone.....................................................................................................113
5.4 Call Types............................................................................................................................115
5.5 Group-Based Services.........................................................................................................115
5.5.1 Talkgroup Call........................................................................................................115
5.5.1.1 Intrazone Talkgroup Call.......................................................................... 116
5.5.1.2 Interzone Talkgroup Call.......................................................................... 118
5.5.2 Object Call............................................................................................................. 120
5.5.3 Announcement Call................................................................................................120
5.5.4 Emergency Services.............................................................................................. 121
5.5.5 Site Wide Calls.......................................................................................................122
5.5.6 Talkgroup Scanning............................................................................................... 122
5.5.7 Active Talkgroup Scan........................................................................................... 123
5.6 Individual Call Services........................................................................................................123
5.6.1 Private Call Request.............................................................................................. 123
5.6.1.1 Private Call Request Flow........................................................................124
5.6.1.2 Intrazone Private Call Audio Flow, Call Continuation, and Teardown......125
5.6.1.3 Roaming During a Private Call.................................................................125
5.6.1.4 Full-Duplex Private Calls..........................................................................125
5.6.2 Telephone Interconnect......................................................................................... 125
5.6.2.1 Relationship between Components......................................................... 126
5.6.2.2 Configuration............................................................................................127
5.6.2.3 Telephone Interconnect Call Continuation/Call Maintenance.................. 129
5.6.2.4 Telephone Interconnect Call Termination and Call Teardown................. 129
5.6.2.5 Roaming During a Telephone Interconnect Call...................................... 130
5.7 Packet Data Services.......................................................................................................... 130
5.7.1 Initiating Packet Data Service................................................................................ 132
5.7.2 Data Prioritization...................................................................................................132
5.7.3 Multislot Packet Data............................................................................................. 133
5.7.4 Dynamic Data Channel.......................................................................................... 133
5.7.5 End-to-End Encryption (E2EE) Packet Data..........................................................133
5.8 Short Data Services.............................................................................................................134
5.8.1 Initiating Short Data Services.................................................................................134
5.8.2 Short Data Store and Forward............................................................................... 134

10
 MN005775A01-A
Contents

5.8.3 SDS in Local Site Trunking.................................................................................... 135

5.8.4 End-to-End Encryption (E2EE) Short Data............................................................ 135
5.9 Authentication and Air Interface Encryption.........................................................................135
5.9.1 Authentication........................................................................................................ 136
5.9.2 Air Interface Encryption..........................................................................................136
5.9.2.1 Security Classes...................................................................................... 136
5.10 Busy Call Handling............................................................................................................ 138
5.11 Interference Detection....................................................................................................... 139
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features................................................................. 141
6.1 Voice Services..................................................................................................................... 141
6.2 Data Services...................................................................................................................... 141
6.3 Supplementary Services......................................................................................................143
6.4 Call Logging features...........................................................................................................148
6.5 Mobility Features................................................................................................................. 149
6.6 Console Operator Features................................................................................................. 150
6.7 Console Management Features.......................................................................................... 153
6.8 Enhanced Software Update.................................................................................................154
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management......................................................... 156
7.1 System Management Objectives and Framework............................................................... 156
7.2 Serviceability........................................................................................................................157
7.3 Network Management System.............................................................................................158
7.3.1 Client/Server Networking....................................................................................... 158
7.3.1.1 Windows-Based Clients........................................................................... 158
7.3.1.2 NM Client Applications............................................................................. 158
7.3.1.3 Network Management System Servers....................................................159
7.3.1.4 Zone-Level Servers..................................................................................159
7.3.1.5 Cluster-Level Servers...............................................................................160
7.3.2 Core Services........................................................................................................ 161
7.4 FCAPS Model in the DIMETRA System.............................................................................. 161
7.4.1 Fault Management................................................................................................. 161
7.4.2 Configuration Management....................................................................................162
7.4.2.1 Configuration Management Applications................................................. 162
7.4.3 Accounting Management....................................................................................... 163
7.4.4 Performance Management.................................................................................... 164
7.4.5 Security Management............................................................................................ 164
7.5 Multizone Fault Management.............................................................................................. 166
7.5.1 Multicluster Network Management.........................................................................167
7.5.2 Multicluster Configuration Management................................................................ 168
7.5.2.1 User Configuration Server API.................................................................168

11
MN005775A01-A
Contents

7.5.2.2 Infrastructure Reports.............................................................................. 169

7.5.3 Multicluster Performance Management................................................................. 171
7.5.4 Multicluster User Configuration Server Synchronization........................................171
7.5.5 Multicluster Authentication Centre Synchronization...............................................171
7.6 Network Management Applications Overview..................................................................... 172
7.6.1 Motorola PRNM Suite Applications Overview........................................................172
7.6.2 Other Motorola Applications...................................................................................174
7.6.3 Private Radio Network Management Suite Applications........................................174
7.6.4 Network Transport Management Applications....................................................... 183
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency............................................................................ 185
8.1 Redundancy of Critical Components................................................................................... 185
8.2 Zone Controller Switchover in Redundant Configuration.....................................................186
8.2.1 Automatic Switchover............................................................................................ 187
8.2.2 User-Initiated Switchover....................................................................................... 187
8.2.3 System Behavior During Automatic Switchover.....................................................187
8.2.3.1 Possible Call Processing Behavior During Recovery...............................188
8.2.3.2 Switching Back to the Standby Controller (User Initiated)....................... 189
8.3 Service Redundancy Solution..............................................................................................190
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation...................................................191

12
 MN005775A01-A
List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure 1: Basic Radio System................................................................................................................ 20
Figure 2: Fixed Equipment..................................................................................................................... 21
Figure 3: Antenna Height and Coverage................................................................................................ 21
Figure 4: Simplex Communication..........................................................................................................22
Figure 5: Semi-Duplex Communication..................................................................................................22
Figure 6: Radios to Base Station Relationship....................................................................................... 25
Figure 7: Example: Organization of Users in a Talkgroup......................................................................27
Figure 8: Example of Talkgroups in Multigroups.................................................................................... 27
Figure 9: Trunked Call Initiation..............................................................................................................28
Figure 10: Trunked Call Validation......................................................................................................... 28
Figure 11: Trunked Call Completion.......................................................................................................29
Figure 12: Multiple Site Trunked System................................................................................................30
Figure 13: Mobile Switching Office (MSO)............................................................................................. 31
Figure 14: Example: Multizone System.................................................................................................. 31
Figure 15: Multizone System - Conditions for Interzone Trunking..........................................................32
Figure 16: Modes of Operation in a DIMETRA System..........................................................................33
Figure 17: Pi/4-DQPSK Modulation........................................................................................................36
Figure 18: ACELP Voice Compression.................................................................................................. 37
Figure 19: Time Division Multiple Access - Base Stations..................................................................... 37
Figure 20: Time Division Multiple Access - Radio (Full-Duplex Operation)............................................38
Figure 21: E1 Carrier.............................................................................................................................. 41
Figure 22: Cooperative WAN Routing - Example................................................................................... 42
Figure 23: Satellite Link Based WAN Connectivity.................................................................................43
Figure 24: Ethernet Site Links- Example................................................................................................ 44
Figure 25: Unicast Routing..................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 26: Multicast Routing...................................................................................................................47
Figure 27: Call Processing - Multicast Routing of Traffic........................................................................49
Figure 28: Clusters and Individual Zones............................................................................................... 50
Figure 29: Voice Transmission............................................................................................................... 51
Figure 30: TETRA ISI Communication................................................................................................... 52
Figure 31: Network Management Subsystem........................................................................................ 57
Figure 32: Data Subsystem.................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 33: Telephone Interconnect Subsystem......................................................................................64
Figure 34: Network Security Subsystem................................................................................................ 69
Figure 35: Network Time Server.............................................................................................................71
Figure 36: Transport Core with E1 Connections.................................................................................... 72

13
MN005775A01-A
List of Figures

Figure 37: S6000 Router........................................................................................................................ 73

Figure 38: GGM 8000 Base Unit............................................................................................................ 73
Figure 39: MTS LiTE ............................................................................................................................. 76
Figure 40: MTS 1....................................................................................................................................77
Figure 41: MTS 2....................................................................................................................................78
Figure 42: MTS 4....................................................................................................................................79
Figure 43: MTS4L Rack..........................................................................................................................80
Figure 44: Site Controller (SC)............................................................................................................... 81
Figure 45: BTS Base Radio....................................................................................................................82
Figure 46: Small Control Site..................................................................................................................83
Figure 47: Large Control Site: Non Redundant...................................................................................... 85
Figure 48: Large Control Site: Redundant..............................................................................................86
Figure 49: Dispatch Subsystem..............................................................................................................87
Figure 50: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem............................................................................. 88
Figure 51: GGM 8000 used for CCGW.................................................................................................. 90
Figure 52: Patching with a Conventional System................................................................................... 90
Figure 53: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console..............................................................................................92
Figure 54: E2EE Discreet Listening ICCS Gateway...............................................................................93
Figure 55: Application Server Interactions Defined................................................................................ 99
Figure 56: Home Location Register......................................................................................................112
Figure 57: Home Location Register - Visitor Location Register............................................................112
Figure 58: Intrazone Talkgroup Request from a BTS Site....................................................................116
Figure 59: Interzone Call Request........................................................................................................118
Figure 60: Private Call.......................................................................................................................... 124
Figure 61: Telephone Interconnect in E1 networking........................................................................... 126
Figure 62: Packet Data Services.......................................................................................................... 131
Figure 63: Short Data Services............................................................................................................ 134
Figure 64: Multizone Fault Management - Client Access to Each Zone...............................................167
Figure 65: Multizone Fault Management- Event Forwarding to a Customer-Supplied Fault
Management System.......................................................................................................................167
Figure 66: Multicluster Network Management - Client Access to Each Cluster................................... 168
Figure 67: Multicluster Configuration Management - Provisioning through the UCS API.................... 169
Figure 68: Infrastructure Reports Architecture..................................................................................... 170
Figure 69: Multicluster Performance Management - Client Access to Each Cluster............................ 171
Figure 70: PRNM Applications From a System Perspective................................................................ 173
Figure 71: Zone with Geographical Redundancy (Example)................................................................186

14
 MN005775A01-A
List of Tables

List of Tables
Table 1: List of Telephone Numbers........................................................................................................ 4
Table 2: TETRA System Capabilities..................................................................................................... 52
Table 3: DIMETRA System Capacity .................................................................................................... 53
Table 4: Types of System Server (Constellations)................................................................................. 54
Table 5: Summary of Database Administration Functions..................................................................... 97
Table 6: Hierarchical Listing of Servers Hosting Databases.................................................................. 98
Table 7: Application Server Interactions.................................................................................................99
Table 8: Capacity Lost When Servers Fail........................................................................................... 101
Table 9: Short Subscriber Identity Ranges...........................................................................................106
Table 10: Call Processing Equipment.................................................................................................. 113
Table 11: Security Classes...................................................................................................................136
Table 12: Console Priority Levels.........................................................................................................151
Table 13: Air Interface Encryption - Security Features.........................................................................166
Table 14: Motorola PRNM Suite Applications...................................................................................... 173
Table 15: Other Motorola Applications................................................................................................. 174
Table 16: Object Classes in UCM........................................................................................................ 181
Table 17: High-Level Objects in ZCM...................................................................................................182
Table 18: Call Processing Behavior During Recovery..........................................................................188
Table 19: DIMETRA Documentation for New Systems........................................................................ 191

15
MN005775A01-A
List of Processes

List of Processes
Tracing a Basic Call ...............................................................................................................................27
Call Model ..............................................................................................................................................47
Intrazone Call Grant ............................................................................................................................ 117
Intrazone Talkgroup Call Audio Routing ..............................................................................................117
Intrazone Talkgroup Call Continuation and Teardown ........................................................................ 117
Private Call Request Flow ................................................................................................................... 124
Intrazone Private Call Audio Flow, Call Continuation, and Teardown ................................................. 125
Call Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 128
Initiating Packet Data Service ..............................................................................................................132
Initiating Short Data Services .............................................................................................................. 134
System Behavior During Automatic Switchover .................................................................................. 187

16
 MN005775A01-A
About System Overview

About System Overview

This manual explains radio system concepts and describes the components and functionality of the
DIMETRA system.
The purpose of this manual is to:
• Describe the basic radio system concepts and call processing basics.
• Provide an introduction to the various components and processes associated with the DIMETRA
system.
This manual is an introduction to the DIMETRA system. The information in this manual does not
assume any pre-knowledge of the DIMETRA system or radio concepts in general.

What is Covered In This Manual

This manual provides information in the following areas:
• Radio System Concepts on page 20 provides an introduction to the basic concepts of conventional
radio systems and Motorola trunked radio systems.
• DIMETRA System Technology on page 35 discusses technology behind DIMETRA system.
• DIMETRA System Components on page 54 discusses the hardware components associated with
the DIMETRA System.
• DIMETRA Data Management on page 95 presents an overview of the databases, servers, and
Zone Controllers found in the DIMETRA system.
• DIMETRA Call Processing on page 104 presents an overview of call processing, which takes place
at the MSO equipment in a DIMETRA system.
• DIMETRA System Features on page 141 lists and explains the features and options available for
the DIMETRA system.
• DIMETRA Network Management on page 156 presents an overview of the FCAPS model as
described by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). It also discusses Private
Network Management (PRNM), its software applications or tools used to manage the DIMETRA
system and Network Management Software Tools that support the management of the system and
its component parts.
• DIMETRA Resiliency on page 185 discusses the subjects of geographical redundancy and data
resilience features.
• DIMETRA System Documentation on page 191 contains information on related DIMETRA system
documentation, including third-party documentation.

Helpful Background Information

Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For more
information on the current course offerings and technology paths, see http://
www.motorolasolutions.com/training.

Related Information
See DIMETRA System Documentation on page 191. The appendix includes a full listing of the
DIMETRA system documentation and related documentation.

17
MN005775A01-A
Icon Conventions

Icon Conventions
The documentation set is designed to give the reader more visual clues. The following graphic icons
are used throughout the documentation set.
DANGER: The signal word DANGER with the associated safety icon implies information that, if
disregarded, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING: The signal word WARNING with the associated safety icon implies information that,
if disregarded, could result in death or serious injury, or serious product damage.
CAUTION: The signal word CAUTION with the associated safety icon implies information that,
if disregarded, may result in minor or moderate injury, or serious product damage.
CAUTION: The signal word CAUTION may be used without the safety icon to state potential
damage or injury that is not related to the product.
IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT statements contain information that is crucial to the discussion at
hand, but is not CAUTION or WARNING. There is no warning level associated with the
IMPORTANT statement.
NOTICE: NOTICE contains information more important than the surrounding text, such as
exceptions or preconditions. They also refer the reader elsewhere for additional information,
remind the reader how to complete an action (when it is not part of the current procedure, for
instance), or tell the reader where something is on the screen. There is no warning level
associated with a notice.

18
 MN005775A01-A
Style Conventions

Style Conventions
The following style conventions are used:

Convention Description
Bold This typeface is used for names of, for instance, windows, buttons,
and labels when these names appear on the screen (example: the
Alarms Browser window). When it is clear that we are referring to, for
instance, a button, the name is used alone (example: Click OK).
Monospacing font This typeface is used for words to be typed in exactly as they are
shown in the text (example: In the Username field, type Admin).
This typeface is used for messages, prompts, and other text displayed
on the computer screen (example: A new trap destination has
been added).
<Monospacing font This typeface is used with angle brackets as placeholders for a specif-
in bold Italic> ic member of the group that the words represent (example: <router
number>).
NOTICE: In sequences to be typed in, the angle brackets
are omitted to avoid confusion whether to include the angle
brackets in the text to be typed.

CAPITAL LETTERS This typeface is used for keyboard keys (example: Press Y and press
ENTER).
Italic This typeface is used for citations. A citation usually is the name of a
document or a phrase from another document (example: DIMETRA
System Overview).
→ An → (arrow pointing right) is used for indicating the menu or tab
structure in instructions on how to select a certain menu item (exam-
ple: File → Save) or a certain sub-tab.

19
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Chapter 1

Radio System Concepts

Radio systems provide a convenient and timely method of communication for people engaged in
various public safety-related, transportation, and service occupations. Radio systems differ in design
based on the needs of the individual users. One radio system may support a towing company with a
dispatcher and two tow trucks communicating back and forth. Another radio system may support the
needs of a public utility company with a network of antenna towers and control sites and field
personnel scattered across a wide geographic area. The type of radio system that you have depends
on the needs of your individual organization.

1.1
What is a Radio System?
A radio uses electromagnetic waves to send information across the air. This is accomplished by
producing an electrical signal that moves back and forth, or oscillates, at a rapid rate.
The rate at which a radio signal oscillates back and forth is called its frequency and is measured in
Hertz (Hz). Most radio frequencies are in Megahertz (MHz), or millions of cycles per second.

1.1.1
Basic System Components
A basic radio system consists of equipment that transmits and receives radio signals that are used to
transport some type of information. The information carried by these radio signals can be audio or
data.
In the case of voice systems, the transmitter is used to produce and amplify a radio carrier signal which
is combined, or modulated, with a voice signal from a microphone. The modulated radio signal is sent
to an antenna, which radiates the signal into the air.
The radiated signal is picked up by a receiving antenna and sent to a receiver. Here the radio signal is
processed back into the original audio signal, which is fed into a loudspeaker so that the original voice
message can be heard. See the following figure for components of a basic radio.
Figure 1: Basic Radio System

Microphone Antennas

Transmitter Receiver Loudspeaker

20
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

1.1.1.1
Radio System Equipment
Two-way radio equipment can be classified as either fixed, mobile, or portable. Each of these units
includes a transmitter (TX), receiver (RX), and antenna system.
Fixed equipment is located at a central site. A base station is used to transmit the signal generated
through the microphone to portable and mobile equipment located at some distance. The range of the
base station depends on its power, antenna system, terrain, and environmental conditions. The
location of the base station control is known as the Dispatch Center.
Figure 2: Fixed Equipment

Mobile and Portable equipment are the radios that are not fixed. Mobile radios are mounted in vehicles
and portable radios are handheld devices carried by a person.

1.1.1.2
Radio System Range
The range of a radio system is affected by many different factors. One of the most critical coverage
factors is antenna height and location, because the range of a radio system is limited to the horizon as
seen by the radio antenna. In general, the range of a radio system depends on the effective height of
the antenna. Basically, the higher an antenna is installed, the greater an area receives coverage.
Figure 3: Antenna Height and Coverage

21
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

1.1.2
Communication Types
The communication type used depends on the number of users and the type of equipment available.
Radio systems can use three types of communication:
• Simplex
• Semi-Duplex
• Duplex

Simplex
The most basic type of radio communication is simplex. Simplex communication consists of radio units
operating on a single frequency. Because everyone transmits and receives on the same frequency,
users cannot talk and listen at the same time. Simplex means transmission in one direction at a time.
Figure 4: Simplex Communication

Single Frequency

A simplex radio system works well when there are only a few users who are closely located. When
additional users are added to the system, the competition for the one available frequency can make it
difficult to get a message across. In addition, great distances and natural obstacles such as high hills
and tall buildings can interfere with the single frequency.

Semi-Duplex
Semi-duplex communication uses two frequencies: one to receive and one to transmit. A radio
operating in semi-duplex mode can only transmit or receive at any time. Radios operating on the
DIMETRA system use semi-duplex communication to communicate with the base stations during
talkgroup and multigroup calls. A semi-duplex individual call is also supported in the DIMETRA system.
Figure 5: Semi-Duplex Communication

TX 851.0125 MHz RX 806.0125 MHz

Duplex
Duplex communication uses different frequencies simultaneously, one to transmit and the second to
receive. The transmitter output is isolated and separated in frequency to prevent blocking the input of
its companion receiver. Also called full-duplex, this type of operation is used to indicate that the

22
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

equipment can receive and transmit at the same time. Normally, fixed equipment (a base station)
operates in full-duplex mode while mobile equipment typically operates in semi-duplex mode.

1.1.3
Call Types Overview
There are several possible types of voice calls that can be made. The examples are divided into two
main types of call services.
• Group-based call services
- Talkgroup Calls
- Multigroup Calls
- Object Calls
- Announcement Calls
- Emergency Calls
- Ruthless Preemption
- Direct Mode Operation Calls
- Site Wide Calls
• Individual call services
- Private Calls
- Telephone Interconnect Calls
For detailed information on call types, see Call Types on page 115.

1.1.4
Types of Communication Channels
There are two types of communication channels used in DIMETRA radio system: control channel (CC)
and traffic channel (TCH).

Control Channel (CC)

The controller needs to be able to communicate with all radios in the system to receive call requests
and send channel assignments to the radios in the field. This is the role of the control channel (CC).
Each system has at least one of its channels assigned to function as a control channel. The other
channels are used for voice and data communication.
The control channels are always active. They transmit and receive the signaling to monitor and control
the operation of the radios. The radios use control channels as long as they are not involved in a voice
call.
A radio uses a control channel to send in call requests or to receive call assignments. A radio always
tunes to the control channel except when it is assigned to a call on a traffic channel. When a call is
completed, the radios involved in the call switch back to the active control channel.
To make a call on a trunked system, a radio user presses the push-to-talk (PTT) button on the radio. A
call request is sent over a control channel to the controller. The controller assigns a channel to the
user’s group and sends out an assignment message over a control channel telling all radios that have
that particular group selected to switch to a specific traffic channel.
Radios in the system send a signal to the controller, through the control channel, indicating their unique
identification and talkgroup selection. This signal is sent whenever a radio is powered up or the radio
user changes the position of the talkgroup selector. This process is known as affiliation.

23
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Traffic Channel (TCH)

When one of the members of a group requests voice or data services, the group is assigned its own
traffic channel for the duration of the call. A group that is assigned to a particular traffic channel (TCH)
cannot be heard by members of a talkgroup assigned to another traffic channel.
In a trunked system, the traffic channels can be operated in one of two modes: transmission trunking
and message trunking (with PTT ID).
Transmission Trunking
The controller reclaims the traffic channel immediately after detecting a disconnect signal from the
transmitting unit. The receiving radios immediately returns to the control channel. The entire
request and assignment procedure is repeated for each PTT from the originator or a radio
responding to the original call.
Message Trunking (with PTT ID)
This allows a group to retain the assigned traffic channel for some time, after the transmitting unit
releases the PTT. When a message trunked call is in progress, other radio users within the same
group are allowed to key without returning to the control channel for a traffic channel assignment.
This mode of operation provides positive identification of the transmitting radio and must be
programmed in both the radio and the system.

1.1.5
Basic Site Components
The main components of a basic site include the Site Controller and base radios.

Site Controller (SC)

A Site Controller processes inbound and outbound signaling traffic, assigns base radios for traffic
channel access, and generally monitors and maintains order at the site. The Site Controller maintains a
database that keeps track of the Unit ID of each radio and the radio affiliations to talkgroups.
The Site Controller in a single site performs the following call processing functions:
• Services call requests.
• Recovers and decodes inbound signal requests.
• Maintains a database of active radios and their system permissions.
• Receives group affiliations.
• Checks call access privileges.
• Issues call grants.
• Monitors and controls each call sequence.
• Maintains a list of radios that are waiting for base station assignments.
• Selects and assigns traffic channels as required.
• Selects the control channel.
• Decodes control signals originated by the radios.
• Generates and encodes the proper outbound signaling packets for such purposes as directing
system users to specific channels.
• Generates the data which is superimposed on all voice communications and is used to unmute the
audio circuitry in receivers authorized to monitor audio transactions.

24
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Base Radio (BR)

A base radio serves as the Radio Frequency (RF) interface between the system infrastructure and the
radios. Base radios in a trunked system have three primary interfaces:
• A receiver to pick up the RF signal from the radios
• A transmitter to send RF signals to the radios
• A wireline interface to send audio and control traffic to the system infrastructure
Antenna systems for base stations are usually located on top of high structures such as buildings, hills,
or towers. The base stations are normally located close to their antennas in order to minimize the
losses inherent in the cables connecting the stations to the antennas. See the following figure for the
relationship between the radios and a base station.
Figure 6: Radios to Base Station Relationship

The BTS has several channels and these channels can either be designated to Control Channel (CC)
or Traffic Channel (TCH), which are mentioned below.

1.1.6
Radios
Radios are classified as mobile (vehicle-mounted) or portable (carried by a person, usually handheld)
radios which provide users with the ability to make voice calls, send short data messages, or interface
with mobile data equipment. Each radio is assigned a unique identification number that identifies the
radio to the system. It also contains the logic circuitry necessary to perform the following trunking
functions:
• Generate and transmit requests for service in the form of data words that are then used to modulate
the carrier frequency.
• Interpret the signaling messages sent by the central controller.
• Generate the frequency of the assigned traffic channel.
• Generate tones to advise the radio user of the status of the call request.

1.1.7
Call Processing Basics
Call processing is the sequence of events that the system goes through to handle a call request.

25
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

1.1.7.1
Trunked and Conventional Radio Systems
There are two types of radio systems: trunked and conventional.

Trunked System Operation

In trunked radio systems the users are not assigned to a fixed channel. Channels are common
resources that are accessible to all users on an as-needed and as-available basis. When a radio user
initiates a call, the system assigns an available channel to that call, eliminating the condition where one
channel is busy while another channel is inactive. When the call is finished, the channel is released
and made available for other users.
Trunking takes advantage of the fact that people do not talk on their radios continuously for 24 hours a
day. Most radio users need access to a channel several times a day, but their total time on the system
may not exceed five minutes each. Temporary channel assignment helps ensure that a channel is
available when a conversation needs to take place.
Trunking reduces the number of busies and improves the efficiency of the system resources. A call is
busied if it has been placed in a queue due to no channel being available.

Conventional System Operation

In conventional radio systems users share a common RF channel and compete for air time. In addition,
users not only listen to other conversations, they must monitor other conversations before they can
make a call of their own.
Individual radio users are assigned a particular channel to use when communicating with their group. If
one group has a lot of radio activity while another has only light usage, several people may be waiting
to use their assigned channel, while the other channel sits idle. For example, channel 1 is providing
services to group A; channel 2 is providing services to group B and thus cannot accept requests from
group C; channel 3 is idle but cannot automatically provide services to group C.

1.1.7.2
Radio System Users
The radio system stores information about users according to their individual location, and any groups
to which they have been assigned. This following discusses the various user classifications that are
available in a radio system.

Radio Users
Personnel using the trunked system are assigned a radio that is active in the system. A radio record in
the central controller is used to control the system features that the radio user is permitted to access.

Talkgroups
A talkgroup is the basic unit of communication in a trunked system. In most organizations, radio users
work in groups that are based on their functions and responsibilities. In a trunked radio system, these
groups of radio users can be assigned to communication talkgroups that reflect their function or
responsibilities. The figure below is an example of a talkgroup.
Programming of talkgroups in a radio is based on the communication needs of radio users. A radio can
be programmed with only one or with several talkgroups. Radio users selecting a particular talkgroup
on their radio are assigned a traffic channel when someone in the group requests talkgroup call
services. Group privacy during conversations is provided since only one talkgroup is assigned to each
traffic channel.
Each talkgroup is configured and identified in the system by a unique talkgroup ID.

26
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Figure 7: Example: Organization of Users in a Talkgroup

Talkgroup 1 Talkgroup 2 Talkgroup 3

Multigroups
Several talkgroups can be combined to form a multigroup (also called an announcement group).
Multigroups are assigned an ID from the same pool of numbers as the talkgroups. In this example,
calls placed to Multigroup A would be heard by the radio users in Talkgroups 2 and 3.
Figure 8: Example of Talkgroups in Multigroups

Talkgroup 1 Talkgroup 2 Talkgroup 3

Multigroup A

1.1.8
Tracing a Basic Call
Process:
1 When a radio user initiates a call, the radio signals to the system via the control channel and
requests a traffic channel. In the following figure, Radio 1 is requesting a call, and Radio 2 and
Radio 3 in Talkgroup B are listening on the control channel and detect the request for a call. The
radios in Talkgroup A are also monitoring the control channel but ignore the call request
because they are in different talkgroup.

27
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Figure 9: Trunked Call Initiation

TETRA Carrier

C
T
T
T

1 2 3

Talkgroup A Talkgroup B

2 The system validates the call request, assigns a traffic channel, and signals a traffic channel
grant to all radios of that group. The members of Talkgroup B respond by monitoring the
temporarily assigned traffic channel. Radios in Talkgroup A continue to monitor the control
channel as before. In the following figure, Radio 1 is transmitting on a traffic channel, and Radio
2 and Radio 3 are listening to the call.
Figure 10: Trunked Call Validation
TETRA Carrier

C
T
T
T

1 2 3

Talkgroup A Talkgroup B

3 When the call is finished, all radios in Talkgroup B return to monitoring the control channel. The
traffic channel becomes available for other radios.

28
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Figure 11: Trunked Call Completion

TETRA Carrier

C
T
T
T

1 2 3

Talkgroup A Talkgroup B

1.2
Multiple Site Trunked Systems
Multiple site trunked systems increase the size of the coverage area and provide radio communication
in places that are out of reach of a single site trunked system.
A multiple site system can be analyzed as a grouping of single site systems with a centrally located
point of control and audio distribution. The central controller at each site supervises the equipment and
radios at its location while the centralized control coordinates and oversees the operation of the
individual sites. This coordination requires the use of a device that can communicate with the individual
Site Controllers.
A multiple site system allows radios to roam across large geographic areas without losing
communication with their group. In addition, members of a group can be dispersed throughout the
various sites in the system and still be able to communicate with each other. The following describes
how this can be accomplished.

29
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Figure 12: Multiple Site Trunked System

Site Controller

RF Site

Master Site

Site Controller Site Controller

RF Site RF Site

RF Sites
An RF site is a geographical area within which a two-way radio infrastructure allows communication
between two-way radios. It is the equivalent of a single site trunked system with additional control and
audio links to a central mobile switching office (MSO). Under certain conditions, it can operate
independently in local site trunking mode, but its normal mode of operation is in wide-area trunking with
other RF sites.

Zone
A zone consists of sites connected to the master site. The Zone Controller is the central point for all the
equipment necessary to control and manage the sites in a zone.

Mobile Switching Office (MSO)

A Mobile Switching Office (MSO) is a physical location hosting the equipment for the operation of a
multiple site system. Equipment at the MSO coordinates call processing, assignment of system wide
area resources, and distribution of audio to all the other sites in the system. Central equipment of a
zone or several zones can be placed in the MSO.

30
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

Figure 13: Mobile Switching Office (MSO)

Zone
Controller

Control
Sites

Mobile Switching
Office

Base
Stations

1.3
Multizone Systems
A multizone system refers to a radio system that contains several interconnected zones. This type of
configuration provides a very wide area radio communications network based on the interconnection of
many zones. A multizone system operates with virtually transparent boundaries, creating a
homogeneous system operation over very large geographical areas. The following figure shows an
example of a multizone system.
Figure 14: Example: Multizone System

1.3.1
Conditions for Multizone Communication
A multizone system contains the following elements, which are necessary to maintain system wide
communication:

31
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

• An active control path is required between any two zones in order to be able to coordinate a call
that involves sites in more than one zone.
• Interzone audio paths are needed to route the audio to any zone required by the location of the
talkgroup members.
Figure 15: Multizone System - Conditions for Interzone Trunking
Site 1 Site 4
Site 2 Site 5

Control

Control
Audio

Audio
Co l
Site 3 ro
nt o Site 6
Au ntro o
di l C udi
o A
Control Control Control
Audio Audio Audio

Master Site Co dio Master Site

Au trol
Zone 1 Zone 2
Au
ntr

dio
n
Co
ol

Site 7 Co Site 9
ol
ntr n
Au trol
Co dio Master Site dio
Au
Zone 3
Control
Audio

Site 8

Multizone systems contain various hardware devices and software applications that allow the system
to exchange control information between zones, establish audio paths between zones when
necessary, track radio movement across sites or zones, and provide a management subsystem that
can be accessed from any one of the zones. The terminology has expanded to include home zone
mapping, controlling zone, and participating zone.

1.3.1.1
Home Zone Mapping
Home zone mapping provides the capability to divide into ranges the total number of individual and
talkgroup IDs that can be used in the system and to assign the ranges to the various zones. All of the
home zone assignments for groups and individuals are compiled into two home zone maps:
• Individuals to Home Zone
• Groups to Home Zone
The zone assigned to a particular ID is the home zone of this ID. The home zone to which an ID is
assigned has an impact on how the system operates. Home zone assignment affects system operation
in the following ways:
• Configuration information is distributed throughout the system based on the home zone assignment
of the ID.

32
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

• A Zone Controller stores only the configuration information for those individual and group IDs that
are home to that zone.

1.3.1.2
Controlling Zone
For group call services, the home zone of the group is always the controlling zone for the call,
regardless of the zone where the group member is currently registered. Depending on system
configuration, this can impact the number of interzone calls versus the number of single-zone calls that
take place in the system. This can then affect the number of interzone resources that are needed
between any two pair of zones.

1.3.1.3
Participating Zone
A participating zone is any zone containing one or more users involved with a call controlled by another
zone. When a talkgroup member requests a call that requires more than one zone, the controlling zone
receives acknowledgments from all participating zones before the call is granted. Resource allocation
is invoked by a request sent from controlling zone to all participating zones. The acknowledgment from
a participating zone is only sent if resource allocation is successful.

1.3.1.4
Modes of Operation
The following figure shows the normal mode of operation and the three fall back modes with reduced
capabilities: Zone Isolated Wide Area Trunking, Local Site Trunking, and Direct Mode Operation
(DMO).
Figure 16: Modes of Operation in a DIMETRA System

Local Site
Trunking

Zone Isolated
Wide Area
Trunking
Direct
Operation
Mode

Wide Area Trunking with Interzone Trunking

33
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 1: Radio System Concepts

NOTICE: In the figure, the circles do not represent coverage. In reality, the coverage of base
stations overlaps.

1.3.1.4.1
Wide Area Trunking with Interzone Trunking
This is the normal operating state for each site in the system. If all sites are in wide area trunking with
interzone trunking mode, there are communication paths covering the entire zone and the interzone
links are functional. The Zone Controller is in control of call processing and audio routing; each site has
an active control channel and at least one operational traffic channel. Interzone and site links must be
operational to support the control and audio traffic between the remote sites, the MSO and other zones
in the system.

1.3.1.4.2
Fall Back Modes
There are three fall back modes in a DIMETRA system detailed below: Zone Isolated Wide Area
Trunking, Local Site Trunking, and Direct Mode Operation.

Zone Isolated Wide Area Trunking

Zone Isolated Wide Area Trunking is the mode a zone enters when interzone links are lost. Radios
registered with the zone can still communicate with each other, but communication with radios in other
zones is impossible.

Local Site Trunking

A mode of operation that takes place when there is a loss of the control path to a site or all the audio
paths to a site are lost. The affected site operates as a single site trunked system providing services to
radios registered with the site. Audio is not routed to the MSO, it remains within the site. The remote
Site Controller is in control of call processing at the site while the Zone Controller maintains all other
sites in wide area trunking.
The site can stay in local site trunking mode as long as there is a good control path between the Site
Controller and the registered base stations, an active control channel, and a working traffic channel.

Direct Mode Operation (DMO)

If all connections to the Radio Network Infrastructure (RNI) are lost, the individual radios that support
this feature can enter into direct mode operation. This means that the radio uses its own antenna and
amplifying power to communicate with other radios that support DMO and are within range.

1.3.2
Interzone Group Service Availability
For group-based services, there are three possibilities for call requests:
• Full interzone group service availability: All zones are in a state of interzone trunking with respect to
the home zone of the group.
• Reduced interzone group service availability: At least one participating zone is in interzone trunking
with the home zone of the group and at least one zone is not.
• Zone isolated group service availability: The zone can provide call services only within its own site
resources.

34
 MN005775A01-A
DIMETRA System Technology

Chapter 2

DIMETRA System Technology

The DIMETRA system is a digital radio communications system that provides radio users with voice
and data services over a very wide geographical area. Users at any location within the coverage area
can press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button on their radios to make calls to any valid group or individual
located anywhere in the coverage area (which can cover thousands of square miles).
The system requires a complex network of workstations, high-speed Local Area Network (LAN) and
Wide Area Network (WAN) facilities, sophisticated databases, and management software.
The DIMETRA system allows communication across multizones and allows users from different zones
to be combined into talkgroups. This means that users can communicate across a wide geographic
area and use a wide range of communication capabilities, provided that the user configuration is well-
planned and systematically implemented.

2.1
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
The TETRA standard was developed by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
for private mobile radio. TETRA provides standardization for radio system services, system interfaces,
and methods for registration and call processing. ETSI has defined TETRA as open standard to
provide standardization and interoperability of telecommunication systems and their application.
Some of the TETRA standards include:
25 kHz carrier spacing
Pi/4-DQPSK modulation
ACELP voice compression
36 Kbps carrier data rate
28.8 Kbps user data rate
TDMA with 4 time slots per carrier
The TETRA standard defines the air interface between radios and the infrastructure. This enables
radios from different suppliers to be used for basic TETRA operations regardless of the supplier of the
infrastructure.
The most typical users of a TETRA system include public safety, transportation, utilities, industrial
organizations, government agencies, and private telecommunication agencies.

2.1.1
Spectrum Management
Because frequency spectrum is a finite resource, the use of channels is authorized and licensed by
government agencies in most countries. International regulations fall under the jurisdiction of the
International Telecommunications Union (ITU). The European Telecommunications Standards Institute
(ETSI) produces standards and regulations for telecommunications in the European region.
How the spectrum is distributed among agencies is country-specific.
In all cases, a license to operate radio equipment is required and must be applied for with the
appropriate governing body. The license is granted to operate on a particular frequency, or set of
frequencies, with specific eligibility rules that must be met.

35
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

2.1.2
Pi/4-DQPSK Modulation
A radio transmitter sends signaling across at a particular carrier frequency. To deliver intelligible traffic
across this carrier, the radio transmitter modulates outbound traffic with the carrier signal. The receiver
then demodulates the traffic from the carrier signal. The popular forms of modulation are amplitude
modulation, frequency modulation, and phase modulation.
The DIMETRA system uses pi/4-Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (pi/4-DQPSK) modulation.
This modulation method uses phase shifts in the transmit frequency to reflect different digital values.
As shown in the figure below, pi/4-DQPSK modulation uses eight separate carrier phases. Up to four
possible phase shifts can be made from any phase point. Each possible shift in phase is assigned a
two-digit binary value (00, 01, 10, 11). This is an improvement over many other phase shift keying
methods which only provide a single-digit binary value for each phase shift.
The phase shift example shows a transmission shift from phase 0 (in phase) to 3pi/4. The receiver
would recognize this shift and declare the received value as 01. The next phase shift shown is from
3pi/4 to pi/2. The receiver would recognize this shift as a binary value of 10. Each point offers four
possible phase shifts for the next transmission.
Figure 17: Pi/4-DQPSK Modulation

Phase Shift Example

01 10 11 11
π/2 π/2

10
3π/4 3π/4 -π/4
11

00

01
01
π 0 π 0
11

10
11
-π/4 -π/4
-3π/4 -3π/4

-π/2 -π/2

2.1.3
ACELP Voice Compression
Voice signaling must be compressed to maintain the high rates of traffic flow. The DIMETRA system
and its radios use the Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction (ACELP) compression method,
according to the TETRA standard.
Most voice compression methods are similar. The analog audio is first converted into some form of
electronic or digital signaling, such as pulse code modulation (PCM). Any silence or redundant data is
then noted and eliminated. Any remaining data is compared to a codebook. Each chunk of the data is
replaced by an index number from the codebook. The receiver then receives the data, looks up the
index numbers from its codebook, and reconstructs the data.
The ACELP compression method uses voice prediction algorithms and filters, along with its own
particular codebook, which allows quality audio to be synthesized in as little as 8 Kbps. As shown in
figure below, the radio processes 30 msec blocks of speech. The final compressed signal is placed in a
TDMA time slot for transmission.

36
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Figure 18: ACELP Voice Compression

30 msec 30 msec 30 msec 30 msec

ACELP Encode ACELP Encode ACELP Encode ACELP Encode

Error Control Error Control

14,2 msec 14,2 msec

TDMA Frame (56,67 msec) TDMA Frame (56,67 msec)

2.1.4
Time Division Multiple Access
The DIMETRA base stations and radios use Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA). Each carrier
signal is divided into four time slots, creating four channels for each 25 kHz carrier.

TDMA for DIMETRA Base Stations

Each base station can send a continuous stream of traffic for all four time slots. Since each base
station is full-duplex, it is able to send and receive traffic simultaneously on its transmit and receive
channels. As shown in the figure below, the first channel on the first base station is typically configured
as the control channel. All other channels at the site (base stations 2-8) are configured as traffic
channels or packet data channels as required. The first channel on base stations 2-4, however, are
also configured with control channel capability, allowing any one of them to operate as a control
channel if the primary control channel fails. The figure shows the typical channel configurations made
for a site with up to eight base radios.
Figure 19: Time Division Multiple Access - Base Stations
CC VC VC VC CC VC VC VC CC VC VC VC CC VC VC VC
Base 25kHz
Radio Physical
1 Carrier

VCCC VC VC VC VCCC VC VC VC VCCC VC VC VC VCCC VC VC VC

Base 25kHz
Radio Physical
2-4 Carrier

Base VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC VC 25kHz
Radio Physical
5-8 Carrier

TDMA for DIMETRA Radios

Radios only operate on a single channel at any one time to send or receive traffic. Since the radios do
not have true full-duplex capability, the radio switches between the transmit and receive channels to
simulate full-duplex capability for telephone interconnect calls and full-duplex individual calls. The

37
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

transmit and receive time slots are offset by two slots to accommodate this switching and to allow the
radio to both send and receive traffic within each time frame.
Figure 20: Time Division Multiple Access - Radio (Full-Duplex Operation)

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX
Base
Station 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Downlink

Radio 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Uplink
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4

2.2
Network Technology
The DIMETRA system is based on various networking technologies and architectures.

2.2.1
Local Area Network
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a data communications system designed to link computers and
peripheral devices such as printers and modems. LAN cabling has a limited usable distance of up to
100 m (329 ft) and is best used within a building or campus environment. The advantage of using a
LAN is that users can share peripheral devices connected to the LAN instead of having those devices
attached to each computer. Network users can also share information stored in the network server,
such as databases and programs. In addition, network users can communicate with each other through
messaging or email.

Ethernet Technology
Ethernet technology refers to a LAN used to connect computers and peripheral devices (such as
printers, modems) so they can be shared by users of the network. Originally developed to run at 10
Mbps, Ethernet networks can now run at 100 Mbps. Ethernet can use twisted pair, coaxial, or fiber
optic cabling with BNC, RJ-45, or fiber optic connectors.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) created the 802.3 standard for the operation
of 10 Mbps networks. There are various types of 802.3 standard, based on the type of cabling used:
10Base-5 – Thick Ethernet
10Base-2 – Thin Ethernet
10Base-T – Twisted-pair Ethernet
10Base-FL – Fiber Optics
Ethernet accesses data using Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD). This
method allows multiple users to access the network through a common cable. All devices attached to
the network check for transmissions in progress, signals are checked at the start of transmission and
during transmission. Signals are sent if no other transmission is detected; otherwise, the transmission
is delayed. Collision detection is applied when two or more devices transmit at the same time. A device
knows if a collision occurred when it does not receive its own transmission back. Each device stops
transmission and attempts to retransmit after waiting a certain amount of time, which is different for
each device and determined by an algorithm.

38
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Star Topology
The LAN topology most frequently used in DIMETRA System is the star topology, where the end points
on a network are connected to a common central device by point-to-point links. The information
arriving at the common device is broadcast to all the end-point devices; each device is responsible for
determining whether the information is intended for it or not. Characteristics of the star topology
include:
• Twisted-pair cable is used for the links between the central and end devices.
• Link isolation is used-if a fault occurs on one link, the other links remain unaffected.
• A switch serves as the central device.
• The end devices share the available bandwidth.

Virtual LANs
The use of intelligent switches instead of passive hubs to form Ethernet networks permits the use of
Virtual LAN (VLAN) technology. With VLAN technology, a network designer or network administrator
can form Virtual Ethernet segments. In a conventional Ethernet LAN, a group of communicating
stations were physically connected to a shared hub or a shared cable segment. All members of the
group needed to be within 100 cable meters of that hub of the group. If one of the group members had
to move to a new location, cabling changes would have to be made to accommodate the move.
VLAN technology allows a system administrator to assign each port of a switch to members of different
Ethernet segments. The MSOs in a DIMETRA system use switches that support VLAN technology in
an extended stackable configuration.
The use of intelligent switches instead of passive hubs to form Ethernet networks permits the use of
Virtual LAN (VLAN) technology, IEEE 801.2Q.

Switched Ethernet
Switched Ethernet is a 10Base-T or 100Base-T system in which all devices are connected to a central
distribution point through their own cable. With switched Ethernet, the central, passive hubs used to
form conventional core LAN switches are replaced with intelligent switches. The switches allow each
sending computer to be temporarily directly connected to a single receiving computer. The switch acts
as the central point of a star topology network. Therefore, the two computers do not experience
collisions, and the full bandwidth of the transmission medium is available to any two stations that wish
to communicate.
Switched Ethernet technologies are used to allow equipment to communicate within a zone. The
system uses LAN transmission to handle the flow of intrazone data. It also uses Wide Area Network
(WAN) transmission to handle the flow of interzone data.
Three basic types of information are exchanged in the system: voice, call control, and network
management traffic. Network management and control information must be exchanged between
devices installed within each individual zone, and between devices installed in different zones.
Ethernet and Frame Relay are the primary communication technologies used to implement high-speed
exchanges of management, control, and voice traffic among the various devices within an individual
zone.
Routers are used to implement high-level transport connections between network nodes in the system.
Routers make the LAN connections and WAN transmission facilities transparent to the network nodes
that may be communicating either within the same zone or between one zone and another. Routers
also allow alternate paths to be implemented between interconnected equipment to permit the system
to continue operating should specific physical links fail.

39
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

2.2.2
Wide Area Network
The three types of WAN technologies used are:
• Leased lines (point to point)
• Packet-switched
• Circuit-switched

Leased lines
Leased lines provide a dedicated single path through an external provider from one location to another.
It is possible to use either E1 or Ethernet (see Ethernet Site Links on page 43). Speeds range from 56
kbps to 2.048 Mbps in case of E1. In case of Ethernet the speeds vary depending on the provider.
Leased lines provide dedicated service and no call setup time, but the bandwidth is not flexible. A 4-
wire analog leased line provides slower speeds, generally up to 33.6 kbps.

Packet-switched Networks
Packet-switched networks break messages apart into packets and tag each packet with source and
destination addresses. Packet-switching has several advantages:
• Packets can be routed around network problems.
• They can maximize link efficiency by making optimal use of bandwidth.
• They can be more cost effective than leased lines.
Frame relay switching provides high-speed packet-switching over Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs)
referenced by Data Link Connection Identifiers. Local Management Interface (LMI) extensions provide
additional management capability. Frame relay includes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) algorithm
that detects corrupted bits. Any needed retransmission is performed at higher protocol layers such as
TCP.

Circuit-switching
Circuit-switching provides a dedicated path between a sender and receiver for the duration of the
communication. The advantages of the circuit-switched networks are dedicated circuits for the call and
customers do not pay for idle bandwidth. Disadvantages are call setup time and potential under-
utilization of the communication channel. Circuit-switching is useful for short duration transmissions, for
feeders to main sites or for backup/disaster recovery situations.

E1 Carrier
An E1 carrier is a telecommunications facility designed to carry digital information at a bit rate of 2.048
Mbps. In conventional telecommunications, the most common use for an E1 carrier is to connect
central offices within an individual telephone company. Telephone companies also lease E1 carriers to
their customers for their own private purposes. Most systems use E1 circuits to transmit digitized voice,
management, and control traffic between zones. The Frame Relay protocols provide the means for
exchanging information over the E1 communication facilities that connect remote zones.
Various types of transmission media can be used in implementing a private E1 facility, such as various
types of privately installed cabling or point-to-point microwave circuits.
An E1 circuit is divided into 32 time slots, each of which implements a separate communication
channel that can support a bit rate of 64,000 bps. Each of these individual channels is referred to as a
Digital Signal Level zero (DS0) channel.
The term framing refers to the order in which user bits and other information is transmitted over a
physical transmission medium. An E1 frame comprises a total of 256 bits. Each of the 32 inputs is
assigned a fixed time slot; the E1 uses a time-division multiplexing technique to divide the capacity of

40
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

the carrier into 32 channels. The framing bit is used to create a pattern to help synchronize the
equipment. The figure below illustrates the format of the E1 transmission frame.
Figure 21: E1 Carrier

256 bits in 125 μs

Time Slot Time Slot Time Slot Time Slot Time Slot Time Slot
0 1 2 16 30 31

8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits

Framing/ Signaling
CRC Slot Time Slot

Frame Relay
Frame Relay is a simplified form of connection-based, packet-switching service in which synchronous
frames of data are routed to destinations indicated on the header information. Frame Relay assumes
an error-free physical link and therefore does not guarantee data integrity. Error detection and
correction responsibility is left with the end devices.
Frame Relay uses the synchronous High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) frame format up to 4096
octets in length. Each frame contains a start flag, two octets that contain the information required for
multiplexing across the link, the data information (payload), two octets generated by a Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) of the rest of the octets between the flags, and the end flag.
Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) are used to form a connection between any two devices attached to
a Frame Relay cloud. Virtual circuits are logical, bidirectional, end-to-end connections that appear to
the user as dedicated links. Each PVC is given a unique number on each physical circuit along the
path between the two devices. This unique number is called a Data Link Connection Identifier (DLCI).
The DLCI is automatically changed to the PVC number of the next physical circuit as it passes through
each switch along the path. A DLCI is different from a network address in that it identifies a circuit in
both directions, not a particular endpoint. A frame contains only one DLCI, not a source and
destination.
In general, the only DLCI numbers you see are those numbers assigned to the physical circuits on the
perimeter of the Frame Relay cloud. DLCIs only have local significance and represent end-to-end
virtual connections that have a permanently configured switching path to a certain destination. Thus, by
having a system with several DLCIs configured, you can communicate simultaneously with several
different sites.

2.2.3
Multi-LAN Sharing
In some cases it is possible to share some of the network transport equipment over more than one
zone.
In order to combine several zone cores within one MSO (up to three zones within an MSO) a Multi-LAN
Share MSO concept is used. A Multi-LAN Share MSO is defined to have multiple zone cores that are
collocated at the same physical site.
A Multi-LAN Share MSO provides Intra-MSO connectivity. Within a Multi-LAN Share MSO, several
VLANs and virtual ports are created on the Core LAN Switch and each exit router group to provide
peer-to-peer InterZone communications between exit routers in the share. A maximum of six exit
routers are supported in one Multi-LAN Share MSO; one pair per individual zone core. To learn more
about exit routers read the manuals S6000 Routers and GGM 8000 Gateway.
A SZC can be added to an existing Multi-LAN Share MSO, but can only support a single zone. In order
to support more than 3 zones within the MSO, Multi-LAN shares will be connected together, or
connected to single zone cores. The links will be via E1 connection to the exit routers, to form so called
Inter-MSO connections.

41
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

2.2.4
Cooperative WAN Routing (CWR)
The Motorola Cooperative WAN Routing (CWR) solution offers simple, reliable, passive relay panels
controlled directly from the routers. In multizone systems, the routers are configured in pairs to provide
path redundancy for audio and control packets. With CWR, the routers work to control an external relay
panel to switch a group of 12 non-redundant E1 links between the two routers. One router is always
considered as the "Active" router and the other router is considered as the "Inactive" router. Each
router can be provisioned with two 12-port E1 modules, providing up to 24 E1 link terminations per
router pair.
CWR interfaces the master site in one zone to Radio Frequency (RF) sites, dispatch sites, and other
zones. Frame relay Permanent Virtual Circuits (PVCs) are set up on all intrazone links. When Multilink
Frame Relay (MFR) is used for higher bandwidth requirements, Constituent Virtual Circuits (CVCs) and
Aggregated Virtual Circuit (AVCs) are also configured. The interzone links use MFR to bundle multiple
E1 links together providing one logical link. E1s are configured as CVCs then, as one logical AVC.
Multiple E1s are required between the zones that have physical connectivity.
Figure 22: Cooperative WAN Routing - Example

MSO 1

CWR

ZONE 1-7

E1 E1

MSO 2 MSO 3
E1
CWR CWR

ZONE 8,9, &10 ZONE 11

2.2.4.1
Satellite Link Based WAN Connectivity
NOTICE:
• Only 2 MSOs can be connected via Satellite.
• Each MSO can be 1 zone only.
• Satellite link bandwidth is limited to 1 Mb/s throughput.

42
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Figure 23: Satellite Link Based WAN Connectivity

VSAT Link

MSO 01 MSO 02

Zone 1 Zone 2
E1 Link E1 Link

Satellite links are supported for connecting two single zone MSOs. Satellite link connectivity is limited
to 1 Mb/s.

2.2.5
Ethernet Site Links
The ESL feature provides a means to establish Ethernet connections of three types:
• Base Station links (single and redundant)
• Inter-zone links
• Remote control site links terminated at control site routers
Ethernet links are supported over a Layer 2 or Layer 3 of the GBN (Ground Based Network). An
unencrypted Ethernet link to the Mobile Switching Office (MSO) is represented by an IP tunnel
terminated at the MSO router and an MTS.

43
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Figure 24: Ethernet Site Links- Example

MSO 1

BH

ZONE 1-7

Ethernet Ethernet

Ethernet
MSO 2 MSO 3

BH BH

ZONE 8,9, &10 ZONE 11

Ethernet routers support unencrypted tunnels. MSO routers with Ethernet-based WAN interfaces are
always deployed in pairs. The primary router is connected to the primary Backhaul switch and
terminates the primary Ethernet links, and the secondary router is connected to the secondary
Backhaul switch and terminates the secondary Ethernet link.

2.2.6
Satellite Links
The DIMETRA system supports the use of satellite links from the MSO to a single BTS or to the first
BTS site on the ring. Both E1 and Ethernet site links over satellite links are supported. However, some
limitations apply:
• Sites connected through satellite links do not support Packet Data.
• Satellite links have considerably higher delay which may impact voice quality and call setup time.
DIMETRA also supports inter-MSO satellite link for connecting two single zone MSOs.
You can configure the Ethernet Site Link over satellite links using the following applications: Transport
Network Configuration Manager (TNCT), TETRA EBTS Service Software (TESS), and User
Configuration Manager (UCM).

2.3
Digital Motorola Enhanced Trunked Radio (DIMETRA)

44
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

2.3.1
DIMETRA System Components
The basic components of the DIMETRA system include:
• Radios (portable or mobile)
• Sites (Mobile Switching Office, control sites, and BTS sites)
• Zones (composed of multiple sites)
• Clusters (composed of multiple zones)
• System (single zone, cluster, or multizones)
The DIMETRA system distributes the call processing load between the zone or zones that comprise
the system. User configuration information also is shared among the zones. Each zone has a Local
Area Network (LAN). The LANs are interconnected through a high-speed transport network to form a
Wide Area Network (WAN). The WAN allows user configuration information, call processing
information, and audio to be conveyed throughout the system.
Each zone is responsible for managing its own elements. This includes configuring the physical
infrastructure, managing mobility within the zone, and processing calls within the zone. Some call
features operate only within a zone, so they are defined as zone level functions.

2.3.2
DIMETRA System Core
At the centre of the DIMETRA system is a transport core designed to carry the system applications.
This transport core uses several network technologies to cover the needs of the communications
system.
The goal of the transport core is to create a large system solution that meets the following
characteristics:
• Scalable Platform: The transport core supports a large number of zones/sites per system. Multizone
systems are formed with max 16 clusters, max 7 zones per cluster and max 56 zones per system.
• Digital only platform that supports Algebraic Code Excited Linear Prediction (ACELP) for voice
transmission.
• The systems support the operation of IP-based consoles in a packet-based environment.
• The transport core provides the ability to transparently transport vocoded audio. Once voice is
vocoded, the digital information is passed all the way through the network with no conversions
required. Conversion to the original audio format is required only at the destination receiver. The
DIMETRA system supports air interface encryption.
• The transport core consists of a packet transportation network that is not concerned with what is
contained in the packets.
The DIMETRA system includes an Internet Protocol (IP) based infrastructure that provides IP multicast
technology for dispatch services and RF sites. This technology allows group calls to be set up,
processed, and torn down easily in a packet environment, replacing circuit switched methods.

2.3.3
Unicast Routing
Unicast routing involves sending one or more packets from a source device to a destination across the
network. The source encapsulates its data in a packet and places a destination address in the header
of the packet. Network transport devices, such as routers and switches, observe the destination
address for incoming packets and direct the packets toward their destination. The DIMETRA network
uses various routing protocols for transporting packets.

45
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

The following figure shows a source sending traffic across a network to a single destination.
Figure 25: Unicast Routing

Most datagrams sent across a typical network use unicast messaging to deliver information between
one point and another.

2.3.4
Multicast Routing
Multicast routing involves a point-to-multipoint routing of traffic. Multicast differs from unicast, where
packets are routed from one point to another. Multicast also differs from broadcast, where packets are
sent from a single source to all the devices on the network.
In a basic multicast operation, a multicast-capable router receives Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) to join a specific multicast group. The router, also known as a Rendezvous Point (RP),
collects all the IGMP join messages to identify all the nodes that are receiving the multicast traffic. The
router builds a multicast tree which includes all the recipients. When the source starts to send its
packets, the RP receives the packets, replicates each packet, and sends the replicated packets to
each device that has joined the multicast tree.
The following figure shows a source sending traffic to the RP, with the RP multicasting the traffic to
multiple destinations.

46
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Figure 26: Multicast Routing

D D

D RP

Since talkgroup and announcement calls involve routing of audio between a single source and multiple
recipients, multicast routing works well with group-based audio routing. Multicast allows the
transmitting radio audio to be distributed to the appropriate sites by the RP router. Without multicast,
the source would have to separately address multiple copies of each packet to each of the individual
recipients across the network.
In the DIMETRA network, all the devices associated with a particular call are instructed to join a
specific multicast group. After the join messages are received from the devices, the RP propagates the
multicast traffic to the appropriate devices, sites, and zones that are involved in the call and that have
sent their join message.
The RP is typically defined as the router located near the receiving end of the multicast traffic, rather
than a router located near the source of the traffic. This allows greater efficiency of network resources,
since the higher volumes of multicast traffic are only spread across the receiving end of the network,
rather than spreading all the replicated packets directly from the source location across the entire
network.
Multicast trees for audio traffic are set up as requested and are present only for the duration of the
multicast call. A range of class-D IP addresses (addresses beginning with 224–239) are designated as
multicast group addresses.

2.3.5
Call Model
The main purpose of a DIMETRA system is to provide voice services to radios and dispatchers
throughout the system. The process below describes how a talkgroup call is serviced by the system.

Process:
1 A radio user presses the PTT button to talk to other users in the talkgroup. The radio transmits a
Call Request on the RF control channel at the site. The Call Request is received by the control
channel and forwarded to the site LAN. Before placing the Call Request packet on the site
Ethernet LAN, the base station encapsulates the Call Request message in a User Datagram
Protocol (UDP/IP) datagram with the destination IP address of the Zone Controller.

47
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

NOTICE: UDP is a transport layer protocol that resides on top of the IP. UDP provides a
transaction-oriented, best-effort delivery service. IP is the Internet layer protocol tasked
with defining how data is transferred across the network, how devices are addressed,
and how to route data appropriately. IP defines a universal/global addressing method. It
defines how to fragment, transport, and reassemble data packets
2 The IP packet network routes the Call Request packet to the Zone Controller. Upon receiving
the Call Request message, the Zone Controller checks an internal database to determine the
location of all members in the requested talkgroup (such as RF sites and remote dispatch site
locations). The Zone Controller then assigns a multicast group address to the call and sends the
assigned multicast group address to all the participating RF sites and the consoles at the MSO.
This message is referred to as a Call Grant message and is sent in an IP datagram.
3 Upon receiving the Call Grant message, the RF and dispatch sites extract the IP multicast
address from the Call Grant. The assigned traffic channels at RF sites and the consoles at the
MSO generate a group Join message. The group Join message is an IP control packet.
4 Upon receiving the IP group Join message, the TETRA Site Controllers and dispatch site routers
communicate with RP routers in the system to set up an IP multicast distribution tree. This tree
is used to distribute voice payload traffic to all sites participating in the call.
5 The radio begins transmitting vocoded audio on the assigned RF traffic channel at its site. The
audio is received by the traffic channel and is placed in an IP datagram destined to the assigned
IP multicast address (as assigned in the Call Grant). The IP multicast packet is placed on the
LAN.
6 The IP Multicast audio stream is distributed to all the RF and dispatch sites through the
Rendezvous Point router and IP multicast tree.
7 When the first user dekeys and a second member of the talkgroup transmits while the call is still
active (call hang time has not expired), the same multicast tree is used. Vocoded audio is
received by the traffic channel at the new source site and placed in an IP packet destined for the
Rendezvous Point router of the group. The IP packet flows down the same IP multicast tree
generated earlier by the routers.
8 When the call is over (expiration of the message timer), the sites (RF or dispatch) generate an
IP group Leave message. The Leave messages cause the multicast tree to be taken down.
NOTICE: The preferred mode of operation for a DIMETRA system is message trunking
with PTT-ID. This parameter is programmed in the system, through the User
Configuration Manager (UCM), as message trunking, and in the radios, through their
programming software, as PTT-ID.

48
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Figure 27: Call Processing - Multicast Routing of Traffic

CRP- Control Rendezvous Poiont

8 ARP- Audio Rendezvous Point
5 6

1 2 3

TX
RX TX
RX

1 2 4

CRP ARP 2 3
Zone 1
6 8

TX
RX TX
RX

2.3.6
Traffic Planes
There are a number of logical traffic planes set up in the transport network. These are used to describe
the communications paths which exist within the network and traffic types carried over those paths.
The following traffic planes are the most important ones within the DIMETRA systems.
• Voice Control Plane
• Audio Plane
• Data Plane
• Network Management Plane

Voice Control Plane

The traffic between the Zone Controller and the RF sites within a zone, and between Zone Controllers
in different zones is called Voice Control traffic; the logical plane used to transport this information is
called the Voice Control Plane. Voice Control traffic is responsible for setting up the audio path
between the transmitting site and the receiving site or sites. The Zone Controller, through the voice
control plane, receives talkgroup requests and sends messages to appropriate sites, assigning an IP
multicast group address to use for the call. Control communication from the Zone Controller to the RF
sites is accomplished using multicast; unicast is used for transmissions from the RF sites back to the
Zone Controller.

49
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Audio Plane
The Audio Plane is made up of the unicast routes and multicast trees setup by voice control. Multicast
is used to carry audio packets for all call types (group calls, private calls, telephone interconnect calls)
between radios in a system (both intrazone and interzone).

Data Plane
The Data Plane is made up of the unicast and multicast trees that are used as communication paths
between the Zone Controller and the RNG for the different data services (packet data, short data)
between radios in a system (both intrazone and interzone).

Network Management Plane

The Network Management Plane carries all of the unicast network management traffic between the
network devices (for example, routers and switches), the network management servers of the
Operations Support System and radios.
DIMETRA systems use the same physical link for traffic (audio, data, control) from all three planes.

2.3.7
Cluster and Multicluster Architecture
In the DIMETRA system, up to seven zones form a cluster, and up to sixteen clusters can form a full
capacity DIMETRA system (which may include a maximum of 56 zones total). Each cluster includes a
separate set of cluster-level servers which manage operations in the cluster. These servers include a
User Configuration Server (UCS), System Statistics Server (SSS), and the Infovista Server.
Figure 28: Clusters and Individual Zones

Clusters

Individual
Zones

2.4
End-to-End Secure Communication
The Motorola Solutions secure voice and data solution enhances the encryption and security of two-
way radio communication. When encryption is used to protect digital traffic, the transmitting device
uses an algorithm and an encryption key to transform clear digital messaging into an encrypted code.
Modern algorithms do not just scramble messages, but convert messages bit-by-bit into an entirely
different encrypted form. The figure below shows the basic process used for secure communication.
The sender uses a particular key and algorithm to encrypt clear traffic. The traffic then passes across

50
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

the medium in an encrypted form. The recipient then uses the same key and algorithm to decrypt the
traffic.
Encryption protects the information from being deciphered and understood by anyone outside the
system. Without the proper algorithm and the encryption key, any intercepted traffic is received as a
bunch of garbled digital bits wrapped in packets. If there is no encryption, hobbyists or hostile groups
can intercept and decipher traffic.
The Motorola secure voice and data solution uses sophisticated algorithms to protect voice traffic.
Depending on the algorithm used, a radio can be provisioned with a large number of keys. By rotating
keys on a regular basis, it would be nearly impossible for an interceptor to find the correct key and
decrypt the traffic.
The following figure shows basic secure voice operation between two radios. The transmitting radio
encrypts clear voice using a particular key (CG456) and transmits the encrypted voice to the transport
network. The secure voice traffic is routed over the network while remaining in an encrypted form, and
is transmitted to its intended recipient. The receiver radio then uses the same key (CG456) to decrypt
the traffic and provide clear voice to the user.
Figure 29: Voice Transmission

Clear Voice Encrypted Voice Clear Voice

Clear Clear
Voice Voice

CG456 CG456

Compared to Air Interface Encryption (AIE), the secure voice solution adds an additional level of
confidentiality to the speech traffic and is an enhancement to the system. This service does not replace
any of the other standard TETRA security mechanisms, and can coexist overlaid on AIE.
The main difference between AIE and secure voice is that secure voice provides voice encryption all
the way from one radio to another. AIE only provides security for messages between the base station
and the radios and it does not provide any security for messages that exist within the infrastructure,
whereas secure voice provides security between the end users, even within the infrastructure.
Apart from voice, Motorola has also developed a solution for delivering encrypted data. End-to-End
Encryption for Short Data and Packet Data (E2EE SD/PD) is an overlay service that allows secure
(digitally encrypted) data communications between radios and data applications in the customer
enterprise network (CEN). Encryption/decryption services are provided by the system endpoints:
Packet Data Encryption Gateway (PDEG), Mobile Data Encryption Gateway (MDEG), Short Data
Encryption Gateway (SDEG), and radios, so communication remains secure between the source and
the destination. Secure data is a supplementary service located on a customer premises (the Switching
and Managing (SwMI) infrastructure is not encryption aware). The solution is based on the current key
management solution, in other words, a symmetrical key exchanged with the KMF. Digital encryption
converts the digital data, using an encryption key together with an encryption algorithm, into an
encrypted message which is then transmitted. Only an endpoint that shares the same encryption key
and encryption algorithm is able to decrypt the transmission successfully. Other devices that do not
have the proper key are not able to receive intelligible information.
For more information, see the Key Management Facility (KMF) manual.

51
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

2.5
Motorola Inter-System Interface
M-ISI feature is based on the TETRA Inter-System Interface standard and involves the DIMETRA
infrastructure and additional infrastructure elements which support interaction with the TETRA system
supporting the TETRA ISI.
The ISI allows radios to migrate from/to other TETRA systems and communicate to radios located in
both home and visiting systems. Cross-border communication is also possible over the ISI link.
The following services are provided by the DIMETRA ISI in cooperation with another TETRA system
that uses the ISI:
• Inter- and intra-system Group Calls for a linked group
• Inter- and intra-system Individual Calls
• Inter- and intra-system Short Data Services
• Inter- and intra-system Status Update Exchange
• Migration and Authentication of visiting radios
• Outbound/Inbound Telephone Call for visiting foreign radios
An essential part of the DIMETRA ISI is a gateway which provides the required procedures for
communications and functional abilities mentioned earlier. The ISI gateway in a DIMETRA SwMI
communicates with another TETRA system.
Figure 30: TETRA ISI Communication

E1

The ISI gateway functionality is deployed in the DIMETRA system as an M-ISI gateway located in a
separate dedicated zone/cluster and interacting with the rest of the DIMETRA SwMI by using the
existent interzone and intracluster interfaces.

2.6
System Summary
The first table summarizes the general TETRA system capabilities on a DIMETRA system, while the
next table summarizes the DIMETRA system capacities.

Table 2: TETRA System Capabilities

Feature Support
Digital frequency bands supported 260-275 MHz
350-470 MHz
806-870 MHz

52
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 2: DIMETRA System Technology

Feature Support
Air interface encryption types supported TEA1, TEA2, TEA3
Digital Codec ACELP (TETRA standard for speech
coding)

NOTICE: The frequency bands provided above may differ based on the local regulations of
your country.

Table 3: DIMETRA System Capacity

Feature Support
Maximum number of zones per system 56 zones
Maximum number of clusters per system 16 clusters
Maximum number of zones per cluster 7 zones
Maximum number of BTS sites per zone 100 sites
Number of individual IDs per cluster 128000 IDs
Number of talkgroup IDs per cluster 64000 IDs
Maximum channels per BTS site (MTS LiTE, MTS 1/2/4/8 carriers with 4/8/16/32 TDMA
1/MTS 2/MTS 4) channels

NOTICE: In systems with more than one cluster, each cluster can support the maximum
number of individual and talkgroup IDs. However, the maximum number of individual radios per
zone is 64000.
Radios only need to be provisioned on their home cluster. For radio usage, the talkgroups and
valid sites profiles are only required on the home cluster as well.
If a radio or talkgroup is to be multi-cluster, their valid sites profile must include all clusters sites.
Then the radios and talkgroups can be used cross-cluster.
Multi-provisioning on multiple clusters is only required for talkgroup usage by control rooms. If a
control room in one cluster needs to use a talkgroup from another cluster, that talkgroup – as
well as the profiles (including valid sites profiles) – must be provisioned identically on all clusters
involved.
This identical provisioning across multiple clusters can reduce the total number of radios and
talkgroups that can be provisioned in the system.

53
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Chapter 3

DIMETRA System Components

3.1
Mobile Switching Office (MSO)
A DIMETRA system can be a single zone system or it can have more zones, which then are part of
clusters. Up to 7 zones can form a cluster.
All the components that communicate over Ethernet are connected through multiple core LAN
switches. These switches provide two separate internal LANs that are integrated to provide redundant
links for critical network traffic.
A Mobile Switching Office is a physical location that contains all the components necessary for
controlling calls within a zone and for communicating with other zones to manage interzone calls (calls
that go between zones). In addition, the MSOs provide the hardware and software components that
are used for network management and system configuration.
NOTICE: One of the master sites (which are physical locations in DIMETRA system containing
one or more sets of zone control equipment) in a multizone system is generally designated as
the cluster MSO. This MSO typically includes the cluster-level servers, including the combined
User Configuration Server (UCS) and System Statistics Server (SSS). A single zone system
does not require an SSS.

3.1.1
System Server
The System Server is a platform on which most DIMETRA servers are installed. The platform is an HP
ProLiant DL360 Gen10 server with the KVM Hypervisor, which provides a virtual environment that
allows to install Windows or RHEL Linux servers (containers, VPSs). These virtual servers, from the
networking perspective, behave like separate devices. They are grouped on various physical servers,
as described in Types of the System Server on page 54.

3.1.1.1
Types of the System Server
The following table presents possible configurations, in which the server can be deployed in the
system.

Table 4: Types of System Server (Constellations)

System Server Type List of Entities

Primary Core Server Zone Controller, Core Security Management Server, Upgrade
Install Server, Zone level Domain Controller, User Configura-
tion Server, Zone Database Server, Zone Statistics Server,
Unified Event Manager, System Statistics Server, Air Traffic
Router, Alias Server, MultiCADI Server, Enhanced Authentica-
tion Centre, Short Data Router, Packet Data Router, Radio Net-
work Gateway, MTIG-IP01, MCC 7500 Dispatch Communica-
tions Server
Secondary Core Server Redundant Zone Controller, Core Security Management Serv-
er, Upgrade Install Server, Zone level Domain Controller, Clus-

54
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

System Server Type List of Entities

ter level Domain Controller, User Configuration Server, Zone
Database Server, Zone Statistics Server, Unified Event Manag-
er, System Statistics Server, Air Traffic Router, Alias Server,
MultiCADI Server, Authentication Centre, Short Data Router,
Packet Data Router, Radio Network Gateway, MTIG-IP02,
MCC 7500 Dispatch Communications Server
Dispatch Communication Server Call Control Entity, Audio Gateway Server, Upgrade Install
Server
MTIG-E101 MTIG-E101
MTIG-E102 MTIG-E102
Primary Standalone EAuC Primary Standalone EAuC
Secondary Standalone EAuC Secondary Standalone EAuC
Primary/Secondary Perform- InfoVista Server, Authentication Manager
ance and Security Management
Server

3.1.2
Zone Controller
The Zone Controller is a redundant server application that provides call processing for wide area radio
communications and telephone interconnect calls. Zone Controller is responsible for:
• Processing and generation of call-related signaling.
• Control and allocation of air-interface resources.
• Processing radio registration and group affiliations.
• Control and allocation of Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway (MTIG) resources.
• Collection, sharing, and arbitration registration information with other Zone Controllers in multizone
systems.
• Authentication at radio registration.
NOTICE: The Call Processing subsystem consists of the Zone Controller, which resides on the
Primary Core Server.
Two redundant Zone Controllers are connected to the network through the core LAN switch . This
switch provides connections over two separate virtual LANs, used to switch system resources between
the Zone Controllers and provide high availability for call processing and resource management. While
both Zone Controllers are powered and enabled at the same time, only one Zone Controller is actively
participating in call processing tasks at any one time.
A Zone Controller may have a redundant state of either active or standby. The Zone Controller
responsible for call processing is in the active state. The Zone Controller that is not actively processing
calls in the zone is in the standby state. The standby controller remains in standby mode until the
active Zone Controller fails or until a switchover command is initiated. System information that is
necessary for call processing is downloaded to both Zone Controllers. The Zone Controllers include
hardware for storing data, controlling zone activities, and communicating with zone resources.
For more information, see the Zone Controller manual.

55
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

3.1.3
Network Management Subsystem
The Network Management Subsystem is based on the client/server networking model. The NMS
meshes seamlessly and scales with the other infrastructure elements across the packet-switched
network. The network management subsystem uses the Microsoft® Windows operating system as the
platform for the client personal computer (PC) workstation applications.
Network management is a set of software tools that support the management of a complex radio
communications system and its component parts, which include radios, computers, and inter-
networking components. Network management tools support the maximization of resource availability
while helping to minimize system downtime and maintenance costs.

56
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 31: Network Management Subsystem

Primary Secondary
MTIG-E1 Core Core
To PABX

GNSS
Server 1 Server Server PSMS GGSN 1
Server
GGSN 2 NTS

Zone Database Server (ZDS)

Core LAN SwitchUnified
1&2 Event Manager (UEM) Server
Zone Statistic Server (ZSS)
Gateway Gateway NM Client Air Traffic Router
MCC7500 Voice (ATR)
Logging AIS
Router1 Router2 User Configuration Server (UCS)
System Statistic Server (SSS)
License Manager (LM)

Terminal E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Exit E1-Exit

Server Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4 Router 5 Router 6 Router 1 Router 2

SA CWR CWR CWR CWR

Firewall 1
Terminal
Server E1 - GBN
IP-Tel Client
Switch BTS / Remote Control Zone / Other Zone
To PABX

DCS DCS
Router 1 Router 2
DCS
DCS Server* DCS
CENIB CENIB Switch 1 Switch 2
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS MSO MSO DCS DCS

DMZ Border Border Border Border Border Border
Switch 1&2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4

IMW Customer Network

NOTICE: The server components of the Network Management subsystem reside on the
Primary Core Server and include User Configuration Server (UCS), Zone Database Server
(ZDS), Zone Statistics Server (ZSS), Unified Event Manager (UEM), System Statistics Server
(SSS), and Air Traffic Router (ATR).

57
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Network management provides the tools, commonly known as FCAPS, for fault, configuration,
accounting performance, and security management. The network management functions in DIMETRA
are distributed across several applications and servers that are installed in one of three configurations:
system, zone, and remote. The configurations are designated by the name Operations Support
Systems (OSS). The individual network management building blocks of the Zone OSS and Cluster
OSS can be divided into two categories:
• Private Radio Network Management (PRNM) client applications such as:
- Radio Control Manager (RCM)
- Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM)
- User Configuration Manager (UCM)
- Radio Control Manager Reports (RCM Reports)
- System Health Application Suite
- Historical Reports
- Unified Event Manager (UEM)
- Software Download Manager
• Network Transport Management (NTM) client applications.
- InfoVista®
- Transport Network Device Manager

3.1.3.1
Network Management Servers
The NM subsystem includes the server applications listed below.
Zone Level Servers:
• Zone Database Server (ZDS)
• Air Traffic Router (ATR) Server
• Zone Statistics Server (ZSS)
• Unified Event Manager Server (UEM)
Cluster Level Servers:
• User Configuration Server (UCS)
• System Statistics Server (SSS)
• Unified Event Manager Server (UEM) (optional)
For more information on Zone Level Servers and Cluster Level Servers, see DIMETRA Network
Management on page 156.

3.1.3.2
Operations Support Systems
Operations Support Systems (OSS) is a term used to specify the devices used to manage the system.
This includes network management servers and clients. There are three levels of the OSS: Zone,
Cluster, and Multicluster.
Zone OSS
The Zone OSS refers to the network management system for a given Zone. The servers are always
collocated with the MSO equipment. Examples are Zone Database Server (ZDS), Air Traffic Router
(ATR), Zone Statistics Server (ZSS), and Unified Event Manager (UEM).

58
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Cluster OSS
The Cluster OSS manages a cluster of up to seven zones from a single location. To accomplish its
task, the Cluster OSS must have a routed path to all supported zones. The Cluster OSS consists of
the combined User Configuration Server (UCS) and System Statistics Server (SSS), Unified Event
Manager Server (optional), and the Network Transport Performance Server.
Multicluster OSS
A maximum number of 16 clusters (56 zones) is supported in a multicluster DIMETRA system. A
network management client, which has the NTMS installed can access and configure information
for all the clusters throughout the multicluster system from its location. The client is able to access
User Configuration Manager for each individual cluster to configure radio users and system wide
parameters from its location. The client is also able to run multicluster system performance reports
and able to view individual InfoVista® reports from each of the clusters.

Fault Management at the Zone Level

A zone includes a workstation containing the Unified Event Manager and the traps and MIBs to the
networking equipment. This integrated set of tools is the core application for fault and configuration
management for a majority of the transport devices in the system and provides the following services:
• Unified Event Manager (UEM) provides the topology map, alarm browser, and MIB browser
interface.
• Unified Event Manager (UEM) application adds network management tools and hierarchical
topology maps specific to Motorola devices.
• Traps and MIBs add fault and performance network management tools for the networking devices.

Configuration Management at the Zone Level

Zone-level configuration management tools are available to configure all the devices in the zone. To
the network management user, there is a single integrated interface for accessing configuration
information for all devices in the zone. The network management clients, which have the NTMS
installed allow users to navigate to configure any device in the network.
The tools for configuration management include:
• SSH connection that can be used to access the Command Line Interface (CLI) of the routers and
core LAN switch.
• A script on the Network Management Client (NM Client) that is used to back up and restore the HP
core LAN switch OS and configuration file.

Performance Management
The Performance and Security Management Server (PSMS) is installed at the cluster level and hosts
the InfoVista® application to provide performance statistics. InfoVista® can generate reports and display
performance information for the cluster-level core LAN switches and routers.
InfoVista® provides the following features:
• Discovery of all routers and core LAN switches.
• Creation of single report instances for each discovered device. It can also provide group report
instances.
• Manual or scheduled export report instances for archival purposes (The archives can be used at a
later time to retrieve the information).
• Creation of a One Button Disaster Recovery (OBDR) image that can later be used to restore a
server.

59
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Security Management at the Zone Level

All network management applications have defined access privileges for each user. All the applications
support password protection at a minimum. A single logon allows the user to access all the network
management applications for which they have access privileges without having to log on to multiple
applications. The exception is InfoVista.
The routers and switches have an independent logon which is required if a user connects through a
remote terminal access application (telnet or ssh) to the device. NM includes features for setting user
privileges and controlling their access to view and/or modify information contained in the configuration
databases. Optional Agency Partitioning software allows a system administrator to assign access
privileges to specific applications. These applications include Configuration Manager, Radio Control
Manager, Historical Reports, and System Health Application Suite. The administrator can grant or
restrict user access to particular zones in the cluster.

Network Management at the Cluster OSS

The Cluster OSS acts as a cluster-level integration point. Therefore, the Cluster OSS consists of
applications to manage cluster wide settings.
InfoVista® with integrated MIBs from all networking devices collects detailed network performance
information at each Cluster OSS.
In addition, some configuration needs to be done at the device level to report information appropriately
to either the zone applications, the cluster OSS applications, or both. For example, the trap destination
and community string needs to be configured for each device.

Fault Management at the Cluster OSS

One of the Unified Event Manager's servers in each cluster is configured to collect and present
information from all zones in the cluster. This allows a network administrator to view all the alarm and
status indicators for all the equipment in the entire cluster.
NOTICE: Clusterwide Fault Management on some systems may only refer to DIMETRA Radio
System managed objects and not necessarily IP devices (Routers, LAN Switches) depending
on network configurations.

Configuration Management at the Cluster OSS

The cluster wide settings are set through the User Configuration Manager (UCM) which includes all the
settings for radio users, talkgroups/multigroups, network management users, cluster wide parameters,
and System Health Application Suite settings within the particular cluster. Each cluster has its own
User Configuration Server (UCS) to centrally store the cluster parameters. Cluster configuration
settings are distributed to appropriate equipment in each zone as required.

Performance Management at the Cluster OSS

Performance management tools are needed to do LAN performance management and trending.
InfoVista® is installed at the Cluster OSS to perform this function for long-term historical performance
reports and trending on the LAN devices. This tool collects statistics and stores them to be displayed in
real time, daily, weekly, and monthly graphs.
InfoVista® is configured to collect statistics and provide report capability for the following devices:
• Core LAN Switches
• WAN links
• Core routers
• Gateway routers
• Exit routers

60
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

InfoVista® is configured with integrated MIBs from the managed devices.

Security Management at the Zone and Cluster OSS

All network management applications have defined access privileges for each user. All the applications
support password protection at a minimum. A single logon allows the user to access all the
applications for which they have access privileges without having to log on to multiple applications.
However, this does not include applications, such as Command Line Interface (CLI), that are resident
on the networking devices. Users must log on to the networking devices to run resident network
management applications.

Multicluster Network Management

A network management client can be configured to access zone-level and cluster-level applications in
one or more clusters. This allows the client to launch individual PRNM or NTM applications to manage
faults, configure parameters, or monitor performance for any zone or cluster in the system.
For multicluster configuration management, a User Configuration Server API (UCS-API) is available in
each cluster. Centralized data distribution is obtained by using the collection of available UCS-API’s in
the system. A home zone map can then be downloaded from one cluster and uploaded to all other
clusters. Likewise any necessary information (such as RF sites and call routes) can be distributed from
one cluster to all other clusters.
For multicluster fault management, the DIMETRA system allows trap forwarding to a customer-
supplied fault management system. This allows a centralized collection of traps throughout the system.

Domain Controller
To support MCC 7500 consoles, redundant Domain Controllers on zone level are mandatory. The
Domain Controllers handle both DNS and Active Directory services for the defined AD domain. All
zone DCs are DNS slaved to the zone ZDS. The Domain Controllers handles security, group
information for the MCC 7500 consoles, and provide centralised user account management for Control
Site workstations.
For more detailed description, see the Active Directory manual.

3.1.4
Data Subsystem
The data subsystem enables users of the DIMETRA infrastructure to send data files in various formats
using packet data services, while the short data services enables distribution of short text messages
between radios and/or consoles.
The following figure shows the equipment that supports data services.

61
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 32: Data Subsystem

Primary Secondary
MTIG-E1 Core Core
To PABX

GNSS
Server 1 Server Server PSMS GGSN 1
Server
GGSN 2 NTS

Core LAN Switch 1&2Packet Data Router (PDR)

Radio Network Gateway (RNG)
Gateway Gateway NM Client Short Data Router
MCC7500 (SDR)
Voice Logging AIS
Router1 Router2

Terminal E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Exit E1-Exit

Server Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4 Router 5 Router 6 Router 1 Router 2

SA CWR CWR CWR CWR

Firewall 1
Terminal
Server E1 - GBN
IP-Tel Client
Switch BTS / Remote Control Zone / Other Zone
To PABX

DCS DCS
Router 1 Router 2
DCS
DCS Server* DCS
CENIB CENIB Switch 1 Switch 2
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS MSO MSO DCS DCS

DMZ Border Border Border Border Border Border
Switch 1&2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4

IMW Customer Network

3.1.4.1
Data Gateway
The Data Gateway supports packet data services (PDR), Short Data Transport Service (SDTS), and
Alphanumeric Text Service (ATS). The Data Gateway performs registration services for packet data

62
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

users, maintains user permissions and mobility information, and provides routing of traffic to the radio
network or the GGSN router.
Inbound packet data traffic is received at a site over a packet data channel and sent through the
network to the Data Gateway. The Data Gateway changes the packet encapsulation, checks
permissions for the user (as configured through User Configuration Manager), and tunnels the traffic to
the GGSN router. The GGSN router then provides IP tunneling via a border router to the customer
enterprise network.
If authentication is supported at the customer enterprise network, then the appropriate challenge and
response handshake information must be exchanged before packet data services are granted to the
user. If DHCP services are used, then a DHCP server at the CEN assigns an IP address to the packet
data user terminal equipment when a packet data session is requested.
Radio Network Gateway (RNG) and Packet Data Router (PDR) are jointly called Packet Data Gateway
(PDG).

Packet Data Router (PDR)

The Packet Data Router (PDR) interfaces with the Gateway GPRS and provides encapsulation to
tunnel traffic to the GGSN router. The PDR provides access control for packet data radios, according
to UCM settings which are locally stored in a Packet Data Home Location Register (PD-HLR).

Radio Network Gateway (RNG)

The radio network gateway (RNG) interfaces with the remote sites to handle inbound/outbound packet
data traffic between the remote sites and the PDG. The RNG provides a logical connection to the sites,
and provides encapsulation of traffic between the PDR and the remote sites. The RNG also
communicates with the Zone Controller to maintain a Packet Data Visitor Location Register (PD-VLR).

Short Data Router (SDR)

The short data router (SDR) supports Short Data Transport Service and Alphanumeric Text Service in
the system. The SDR routes short data messages (up to 140 characters) across the network according
to the TETRA Short Subscriber Identities for radio users (ISSIs) and talkgroups/multigroups (GSSIs) as
defined in the User Configuration Manager. For short data messages to radios, the SDR directs the
messages to the appropriate RF site. For short data messages to a fixed customer enterprise network,
the SDR maps the TETRA addressing to an IP address and forwards the short data message to the
host using IP. Short data routing may be point-to-point or point-to-multipoint (broadcast). Depending on
the capacity requirements, a DIMETRA system can have one SDR per cluster or one SDR per zone for
up to three zones in a cluster.

Gateway GPRS Support Node Routers (GGSN Routers)

Data Subsystem also includes Gateway GPRS Support Node Router. For more detail, see Gateway
GPRS Support Node on page 75.

3.1.5
Telephone Interconnect Subsystem
The Telephone Interconnect subsystem provides an interface between the DIMETRA radio network
and an external telephone network, allowing telephone interconnect calls to be made between
DIMETRA radios and the external telephone network. The external telephone network consists of
either a PABX or the PSTN through a PABX. The Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway (MTIG) is
the device which provides transcoding of audio traffic between ACELP and pulse code modulation
(PCM) audio required by the external network. Also, the MTIG provides a gateway for the call control
and setup/teardown instructions exchanged between a Zone Controller and an external network in
order to handle telephone calls. Telephone interconnect paths are defined in the Zone Configuration

63
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Manager (ZCM). Additional telephone interconnect settings for individual radio users, along with other
cluster wide settings for telephone interconnect services, are made through the User Configuration
Manager (UCM).
Figure 33: Telephone Interconnect Subsystem

Primary Secondary
MTIG-E1 Core Core
To PABX

GNSS
Server 1 Server Server PSMS GGSN 1
Server
GGSN 2 NTS

Core LAN Switch 1&2 MTG-IP-Server

Gateway Gateway NM Client MCC7500 Voice Logging AIS

Router1 Router2

Terminal E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Exit E1-Exit

Server Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4 Router 5 Router 6 Router 1 Router 2

SA CWR CWR CWR CWR

Firewall 1
Terminal
Server E1 - GBN
IP-Tel Client
Switch BTS / Remote Control Zone / Other Zone
To PABX

DCS DCS
Router 1 Router 2
DCS
DCS Server* DCS
CENIB CENIB Switch 1 Switch 2
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS MSO MSO DCS DCS

DMZ Border Border Border Border Border Border
Switch 1&2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4

IMW Customer Network

MTIG is a general term used for all types of Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateways. In specific
terms, we can indicate a relevant type of MTIG. MTIG-E1 is an MTIG that uses QSIG signaling towards

64
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

the PABX. MTIG-IP is an MTIG that uses SIP signaling towards the PABX. MTIG-E1 and MTIG-IP are
mutually exclusive within a zone, but not within a system.

Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway

The MTIG operates under the direction of the Zone Controller to transcode audio between ACELP and
A-law or Mu-law PCM and to route this audio between the IP network and the customer-supplied
PABX. The MTIG also generates any required tones for telephone interconnect operation and provides
a gateway path for the control signaling between the Zone Controller and the PABX. The Zone
Controller communicates with the MTIG over the LAN to direct the setup and teardown of telephone
interconnect call. See the Call Processing and Mobility Management manual.

Echo Canceller
The telephone interconnect subsystem features an E1 card built-in echo canceller. For more
information about MTIG solutions, see Call Processing and Mobility Management manual.

Enhanced Telephone Gateway (ETG)

The ETG is a standard PABX, which together with the call route functionality of the DIMETRA system
provides routing and interfacing capabilities to multiple external networks. These are typically larger
networks, which are required to connect to multiple user organization PABXs as well as PSTN. For this
type of networks an Enhanced Telephone Gateway (ETG) is required. The DIMETRA system typically
connects to the ETG, which again connects to the various external networks, that is, customer PABXs
or PSTN. The system typically uses one PABX call route per customer PABX. The PABX call route
only needs to be configured for the zone to which the PABX is connected, that is, where the customer
organization users are defined and the PABX is physically connected through the ETG. The call route
is automatically distributed to other zones allowing the call route to be addressed from any zone.
For more detailed description of Telephone Interconnect Subsystem, see the Call Processing and
Mobility Management manual.

MTIG Firewall
In the MTIG solution based on IP networking, a firewall is used between the MTIG and the Internet in
order to protect the DIMETRA network from direct exposure from the security risks.

3.1.6
Enhanced Authentication Centre
This item provides an overview of the Enhanced Authentication Centre (EAuC) component present in
the DIMETRA system. The EAuC is a client/server software application that handles encryption key
management functionalities: it handles distribution, storage, and update of encryption keys used by the
DIMETRA systems. EAuC combines Authentication Centre and Provisioning Centre in one application.
Depending on specific configuration, the EAuC server can reside either on the Core Server or on a
separate hardware platform.
The Authentication Centre (AuC) Client application provides the user interface for system operators to
perform key management operations. The AuC Client is a Java application that provides a Microsoft
Windows look and feel.

Authentication Centre
The Authentication Centre (AuC) is a Windows-based client/server component used to manage
encryption keys for the DIMETRA radio system. The AuC generates, stores, distributes, and updates
encryption keys used by the DIMETRA systems: optional Authentication and Air Interface Encryption
feature. The AuC also maintains an external connection to the Key Variable Loader (KVL) – handheld
device used to manually load keys into radios and other infrastructure equipment. The KVL is

65
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

connected either directly or via modem and is used for non-encrypted key transfers from the AuC to
each zone or Base Transceiver System (BTS) site entity.

Provisioning Centre
The Provisioning Centre (PrC) component is responsible for provisioning authentication and air
interface encryption keys to each radio supporting encryption or authentication. The PrC connects with
a Key Variable Loader (KVL) and the PrC keys are loaded for distribution to radios. The Provisioning
Centre is isolated from the network. It includes a client, database server, and PrC server all integrated
into one chassis. The PrC runs the Windows 10 operating system and provides a user interface for key
management operations.

EAuC Operation Description

The Enhanced Authentication Centre provides authentication and air interface encryption key
management for the cluster. The EAuC is provisioned with both authentication keys and air interface
encryption keys. The EAuC also generates several other keys which are used for secure delivery of
key material over the network.
For authentication, the Enhanced Authentication Centre distributes the appropriate authentication
material to the Zone Controllers. The Zone Controllers then use the authentication material to
challenge radios that try to register with the system.
For air interface encryption, the EAuC stores and distributes encryption keys over the network to the
appropriate infrastructure equipment for encrypting and decrypting traffic.
Keys in the EAuC are stored in an encrypted form. The EAuC uses CRYPTR 2 device for encryption
and decryption of the key material. Any attempts to tamper with the tamper-proof hardware causes an
alarm to be sent to Unified Event Manager and causes the master encryption key to be erased.

Clear Enhanced Authentication Centre

The Clear Enhanced Authentication Centre (CEAuC) provides Mobile Subscriber (radio) Authentication
without TETRA Air Interface Encryption. Clear EAuC thus offers secure Authentication and
Provisioning in DIMETRA networks operating with a clear non-encrypted TETRA Air Interface.

3.1.7
MultiCADI Server
Multi-Computer Aided Dispatch Interface (MultiCADI) is a server that provides an Application
Programming Interface (API). This enables third parties to develop application programs that can utilize
the facilities provided by the CADI in the system. The API builds upon the CADI API, but provides
additional capabilities that are not available with the CADI.
MultiCADI software operates like a CADI client to the CADI server using the single session available
while operating as a CADI server extending the CADI API functionality with up to 25 simultaneous
CADI clients. MultiCADI provides ID range partitioning between CADI clients and user authentication
when CADI sessions are opened.
If there are multiple zones in a DIMETRA IP SwMI then a CADI server exists per zone. Hence there
can be more than one MultiCADI in a system, up to a maximum limit of one MultiCADI for each zone/
CADI server. In order to support command and event forwarding between zones, a communication
path between every MultiCADI can be established where each MultiCADI communicating with every
other MultiCADI in a mesh topology.
MultiCADI is intended to provide additional capabilities for the CADI. It offers the following capabilities
that are not available in the CADI:
• Support of up to 25 concurrent client sessions plus a client of the MultiCADI Server.

66
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

• Distribution of system and client events to clients based upon Individual Short Subscriber Identity
(ISSI filtering). As a result, clients can only receive events for ISSIs over which they have control.
• Validation of system and client commands based upon ISSI filtering, so that clients are restricted to
send commands for ISSIs and GSSIs over which they have control.
• Support of aliasing services.
• Forwarding of designated CADI system events to clients in the home zone of the ISSI associated
with an event.
• Forwarding of designated CADI system commands to the home zone CADI server of the ISSI
associated with a command.
• Additional validation for DGNA commands to enable a client to ‘DGNA’ a talkgroup into a radio,
even though the client does not have control over the ISSI of the radio.
• Importing of a home zone map file from the DIMETRA IP SwMI in support of the command/event
forwarding.
MultiCADI is mandatory when Radio User Assignment/Radio User Identity (RUA/RUI) feature is
required. It is the MultiCADI API that allows third-party applications to access the aliasing services in
the DIMETRA SwMI. A client application based on the MultiCADI API can then be used to receive
specific RUIS events and send specific RUIS commands. (For more information on RUA/RUI, refer to
the Call Processing and Mobility Management manual.) The Alias Integrated Solution (AIS) is in this
release still supported, together with AIS commands and events. For more information on AIS, refer to
Alias Integrated Solution Feature Manual.
For more detailed description of MultiCADI Server, see the MultiCADI manual.

3.1.8
Alias Server
The Alias Server processes the logon/off requests from the radio users and the book on/off requests
from the third-party clients. It keeps track of bindings between RUIs and ISSIs, that is which RUI is
using which radio, and it handles the configuration of forwarding. Through the MultiCADI API it sends
events to the third-party clients as a result of a logon/off or book on/off. Similarly, it also provides third-
party clients with query services such as enabling clients to determine the logged/booked on state of
radio users and radios.

3.1.9
Network Security Subsystem
Network Security is concerned with the security and protection of the network against malicious or
unintentional electronic threats like virus or hacking attacks. It consists of a number of individual
features:
AntiVirus (A/V)
In DIMETRA System, each MSO requires a Core Security Management Server equipped with the
appropriate A/V Server software. One CSMS is elevated to be the Primary A/V Server serving the
rest of the system by distributing virus definition files to secondary A/V servers in other MSOs and
A/V clients in its own MSO.
Authentication and Two-Factor Authentication
The authentication server utilizes this database each time a client or FTP client (on the trusted side
of the firewall) issues a request to the server as part of the process when a user has to be
authorized before access is granted. Authentication is handled by the Authentication Manager
hosted on the Performance and Security Management Server that serves the entire system. The
Two-Factor Token based Authentication provided by the RSA ACE/Server requires two factors
instead of just one: a memorized PIN number and a code generated by a token.

67
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Firewall
Adding perimeter protection to the DIMETRA system is achieved by adding a barrier between the
“untrusted” network (CEN) and the trusted network (RNI). This barrier is called the Network
Interface Barrier (NIB). NIB is introduced at the Master Site and the Large Control Sites.
Monitoring from CEN
Security-related alarms can be monitored from within the CEN through the Remote Administration
Client.
IPsec/VPN tunnels to RF and Site Links
The Base Stations support IPSec or VPN tunneling to RF or Site Links. The connections are
additionally protected by a separate firewall located between the Core Router and the Backhaul
Switch.

68
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 34: Network Security Subsystem

Primary Secondary
MTIG-E1 Core Core Primary and
To PABX

GNSS
Server 1 Server Server Secondary GGSN 1
PSMS Server GGSN 2 NTS

Core Security Core LAN Switch 1&2 RSA

Management Authentication
Server (CSMS) Manager
Gateway Gateway NM Client MCC7500 Voice Logging AIS
Router1 Router2

Terminal E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Exit E1-Exit

Server Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4 Router 5 Router 6 Router 1 Router 2

SA CWR CWR CWR CWR

Firewall 1
Terminal
Server E1 - GBN
IP-Tel Client
Switch BTS / Remote Control Zone / Other Zone
To PABX

DCS DCS
Router 1 Router 2
DCS
DCS Server* DCS
CENIB CENIB Switch 1 Switch 2
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS MSO MSO DCS DCS

DMZ Border Border Border Border Border Border
Switch 1&2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4

IMW Customer Network

3.1.9.1
Core Security Management Server
The Core Security Management Server (CSMS) is hosted on the Primary Core Server and the
Secondary Core Server in one zone in an MSO. The Primary CSMS on the Primary Core Server is a

69
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

single container which runs a Primary Antivirus Server and can also run the RSA Authentication
Server. The Secondary CSMS on the Secondary Core Server is a single container which runs a
Secondary Antivirus Server, can also run a Replica server. When antivirus is used in the system, a
Primary Antivirus Server is required in the Primary CSMS and a Secondary Antivirus Server in the
Secondary CSMS in each MSO. The Antivirus servers are arranged in a hierarchical structure in the
system.
The CSMS performs the following functions:
• Authentication of users to ensure secure remote access.
• Management of A/V for network clients.

Authentication Server and Replica Server

When authentication is used, the Primary RSA Authentication Server is required on one of the Primary
Performance and Security Management Servers (PSMS). An optional Replica Server should also be
hosted in one of the Secondary Performance and Security Management Servers to provide load
sharing and redundancy. This can be a Secondary PSMS constellation at any of the MSOs, it does not
have to be in the same MSO as the Primary RSA Authentication Server. If a system has only one MSO
and the Replica server is required, then it is deployed on a Secondary PSMS in the same MSO as the
Primary PSMS. If the system has only one zone, then the Replica Server is hosted on the Secondary
PSMS. If the system has more than one zone at its single MSO, then the Replica Server can be hosted
on a Secondary PSMS of a different zone than the one containing the Primary RSA Authentication
Server.

3.1.9.2
Customer Enterprise Network Interface Barrier
The Customer Enterprise Network Interface Barrier (CENIB) is a set of hardware and software
components providing boundary enforcement and attack detection features to provide supplemental
network security protection. The NIB safely enables use of the system’s defined interfaces for
integrated data, network management, computer-aided dispatch, and billing. Deploying NIBs at each
connection point between radio system resources and external networks and equipment provides an
important and recommended level of security.
NOTICE: It is recommended that one NIB is established for each access point to the radio
network. Up to six NIBs are supported.
For more information on network security, see the Network Security manual.
Basic components of the NIB include a firewall and a DMZ switch. These components are
appropriately multiplied when the customer takes advantage of the Geographical Redundancy feature.
The following hardware and software components are part of the NIB system:
Firewall
Fortinet FortiGate 101E.
Network Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) Switch
A switch that provides a distribution point from the firewall to the DMZ.

3.1.9.3
Firewall
The Network Interface Barrier (NIB) firewall is a rack mount server used to ensure that only legitimate
traffic travels between authorized points in external networks and the radio system. The firewall blocks
unauthorized connections, restricts traffic to known applications and protocols, and protects the radio
network from access by external systems.
The firewall used in the DIMETRA System is Fortinet FortiGate 101E.

70
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

3.1.10
Network Time Server (NTS)
The Network Time Server (NTS) together with the Primary Core Server Host OE and Secondary Core
Server Host OE provide a timing reference to the DIMETRA system. It acts as a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server providing a UTC time and date reference to all IP connected system elements
(NTP clients) that support the Network Time Protocol (NTP).
The following figure shows the SyncServer S600 with Rubidium oscillator from Microsemi.
Figure 35: Network Time Server

For more information, see the Network Time Server manual.

3.1.11
Terminal Server
Out-of-band management consists of one or more terminal servers. The servers provide interfaces to
the core LAN switch on one side and to the modems on another. The LAN interface provides
connections to all the serial (console) interfaces of all the devices at the MSO. This connection
provides the means to program an IP address in any device which in turn allows access to all the other
programmable functions. The modems allow for a method to dial into the terminal server connected to
the MSO LAN. Telnet is supported, as well as connectivity to the serial ports of the routers, switches,
and servers.
The LX-4048 series TS key features include:
48 RS232/RJ45 serial ports
10/100 Mbps Ethernet port/ports
Built-in modem
DIAG port

Remote Analog Access

A feature supported by DIMETRA is remote analog access. This allows properly configured PCs to dial
into the network and access the Network Management applications through the terminal server and the
core LAN switch.
Once the dial up client is granted access to the system through a login and password, the client can
launch the zone manager applications or launch the Web browser to access the Unified Event
Manager server. Performance of applications such as System Health Application Suite depends on the
amount of bandwidth allocated to the connection.

Service Access (SA) Firewall

The SA Firewall allows a local or remote VPN connection to the MSO. It also allows for Managed
Services access from a Network Operations Centre.

3.2
Network Transport Subsystem
The transport core at the MSO supports the logical and physical structure with the following
components and functions, depending on whether E1 or Ethernet configuration is used:

71
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 36: Transport Core with E1 Connections

Primary Secondary
MTIG-E1 Core Core
To PABX

GNSS
Server 1 Server Server GGSN 1
PSMS
Server GGSN 2 NTS

Core LAN Switch 1&2

Gateway Gateway NM Client MCC7500 Voice Logging AIS

Router1 Router2

Terminal E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Core E1-Exit E1-Exit

Server Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4 Router 5 Router 6 Router 1 Router 2

SA CWR CWR CWR CWR

Firewall 1
Terminal
Server E1 - GBN
IP-Tel Client
Switch BTS / Remote Control Zone / Other Zone
To PABX

DCS DCS
Router 1 Router 2
DCS
DCS Server* DCS
CENIB CENIB Switch 1 Switch 2
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS
Firewall 1 Firewall 2

DCS DCS MSO MSO DCS DCS

DMZ Border Border Border Border Border Border
Switch 1&2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 1 Router 2 Router 3 Router 4

IMW Customer Network

Switches
The LAN switch used in DIMETRA X Core system is Aruba 2930F-48G 4SFP switch. The Aruba 2930F
is a multiport switch that can be used to build high-performance switched networks. This switch is a
store-and-forward device offering low latency for high-speed networking.

72
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

The Aruba 2930F switch can also be used as a general-purpose LAN switch. Its purposes comprise:
• Core LAN Switch
• Control Site LAN Switch
• DMZ LAN Switch
• FAN-OUT LAN switch
• Backhaul Switch
• DCS Switch
For more information about switches, see the System LAN Switches manual.

3.2.1
Routers
The master site network transport functions in the DIMETRA system are based on the S6000 router
and GGM 8000 Gateway in various functional types. The routing functionalities can be combined in
certain configurations. For details, see the S6000 Router manual and the GGM 8000 Gateway manual.
The following figures present the S6000 router and GGM 8000 Base Unit with technical specifications.
Figure 37: S6000 Router

Figure 38: GGM 8000 Base Unit

Gateway Router
The gateway routers provide network isolation and routing of traffic for a number of components on the
MSO LAN including the Zone Controller, consoles, MTIG, and Packet Data Gateway. Any traffic
intended for these devices is sent to the gateway router then routed to the destination device.
Redundant pairs of gateway routers are installed on separate transitional LANs (TLANs) on the
network to provide full redundancy.
Gateway routers are used for devices that require network redundancy and are multicasting beyond
their local LAN. Gateway routers provide several benefits for the MSO:
• They provide a single access point or gateway to access the core and exit routers.
• They isolate multicast traffic from the various hosts they are servicing.
• They provide redundant connections for hosts with redundant interfaces (Zone Controller) or Load
Balancing devices.
The gateway routers have two 100Base-TX connections to the Core LAN Switch.

Core Router
The core routers perform routing of audio, data, control, and network management traffic within the
zone. They provide control path redundancy and the segregation of network management traffic. The

73
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

primary router provides the necessary services to the sites while the secondary serves as the standby
router.
The system requires a minimum of two core routers for 1:1 redundancy. Each core router has two
separate LAN connections to the Ethernet switch. Each core router is capable of supporting any
combination of up to 250 channels and dispatch sites. Two core routers are added to the network for
every additional 250 devices up to a limit of 700 RF channels/dispatch sites in the zone. The core
router can support both E1 based WAN and Ethernet based WAN.

Exit Router
Exit routers handle traffic to the interzone links. Exit routers also provide high speed Intra-MSO
connectivity between zone cores (up to 3 zones) via the third Ethernet port. For more information, turn
to Multi-LAN Sharing on page 41.
There are two exit routers in each LAN Share. The exit routers serve two primary functions in the
system:
• Maintain the list of all active rendezvous points and the group prefixes served by each.
• Route inter-zone and intra-zone traffic.
Exit routers with Ethernet WAN connectivity are deployed in legacy zone core (E1–based zone). Eth-
exit routers are required to connect an E1–based zone to an Ethernet-based zone using Ethernet inter-
zone links.
The exit router uses dynamic routes to deploy packets among its multiple connections on both the LAN
and WAN interfaces. The packets destined for the control Ethernet interfaces on the Zone Controller,
as well as the packets for network management, are routed through the Transitional LAN (TLAN) ports
of the core LAN switch using dynamic routes.
All routers supporting Multicast traffic now support the use of Static RP files. This eliminates the need
for the Exit routers to act as BSRs (bootstrap routers) during normal system operation.
The exit router can support both E1 based WAN and Ethernet based WAN.

Border Router
Border Routers are managed under the same conditions as the PN routers and handles the interface
to the Customer Enterprise Network (CEN). They connect to the Peripheral Network (PN) on one site
and the CEN on the other site. One or more Border Routers can be implemented at the CEN interface,
however a redundant configuration is not part of the baseline.
In general, the Border Router can be any type of router as long as it supports both the Border Gateway
Protocol (BGP) to the Peripheral Network Router, IPinIP tunneling for PDS, and a Network Address
Translation (NAT) interface.

Peripheral Network (PN) Router

The Peripheral Network (PN) Router refers to a router that forms a DeMilitarized Zone (DMZ) network
for Customer Interfacing and is independent from DIMETRA and Customer IP domains. The PN router
connects to Gateway Routers, Control Sites, Customer Interface Routers (Border Routers) and to other
PN routers.
Routers located in the DMZ are supported by the Router Manager and it is thus necessary to configure
the PN routers in the Router Manager in order to support these devices. However, this feature is only
supported when network security is not deployed.
The PN routers provide 1:1 redundancy at each geographical redundant Location, which may be for
both single links and dual links. Furthermore the PN supports redundant PN/DMZ connections and
router redundancy to other MSOs and control sites.
The Peripheral Network Router only supports E1-based WAN.

74
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

The Combined Routers

One pair of Core/Gateway Routers (Eth-CG) or Core/Gateway/Exit Routers are deployed on Ethernet-
based zones.
Combined Eth-CG and Eth-CGE routers are supported to provide termination for Ethernet links to RF
sites, remote control sites, and inter-MSO links. Combined routers are deployed in pairs. In a
Geographical Redundant configuration each router is placed in a different geographical location.
For increased capacity additional core routers can be added.
For more detailed description of routers in Ethernet Site Links solution, see the Ethernet Site Links
manual, S6000 Router manual and the GGM 8000 Gateway manual.

Gateway GPRS Support Node

The Gateway GPRS Support Node Router (GGSN) is a device that supports the tunneling of traffic
between the DIMETRA network and the supported customer enterprise network. One side of the
GGSN router provides an interface to the Motorola Radio Network Infrastructure (RNI) while the other
side of the GGSN router attaches to a peripheral network to interface with the border routers of the
Customer Enterprise Network (CEN).

3.3
Remote Sites
The following sections describe the different types of remote sites supported in the DIMETRA system.

3.3.1
Base Transceiver Station (BTS)
A Base Station serves as the Radio Frequency (RF) interface between the system infrastructure and
the radios. Base Stations in a trunked system have three primary interfaces:
• A receiver to pick up the RF signal from the radios.
• A transmitter to send RF signals to the radios.
• A wireline interface to send audio and control traffic to the system infrastructure.
The DIMETRA system currently supports the following types of BTS:
• MTS LiTE
• MTS 1
• MTS 2
• MTS 4
The BTS connects to the MSO through a fractional E1 or Ethernet link. For a specific range of bands
the MTS operates on, see the MTS 1: Configuration Installation and Basic Service and MTS LiTE, MTS
2 and MTS 4: Configuration, Installation and Basic Service manuals.
The main functions of the MTS are listed below:
• Radio link formatting, coding, timing, framing, and error control.
• Timing control supervision to radios (Timing Advance).
• Radio link quality measurements (Signal Quality Estimate).
• Site to site frame synchronization.
• Interface translation: radio link to network equipment.
• Switching functions between multiple base transceivers (radio carriers).
• Air Interface Encryption.

75
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

• Local Site Trunking.

• Operation, maintenance and administration agent.
The MTS in all configurations has the following alarm inputs and control outputs:
• 15 x 12 V non-floating opto-isolated alarm inputs - available on the junction panel.
• 2 x Form A relay outputs with Common and Normally Open contacts - available on the junction
panel.
• DOOR alarm - connected to the SC.
All these alarms and controls are connected to the Integrated Alarm Card (IAC) which is internal part of
Site Controller (SC).

MTS LiTE
The MTS LiTE is a single-BR base station designed for indoor working without the requirements for
cooling fans. All modules can easily be accessed through the cabinet front door. Due to its small size,
a complete MTS 2 cabinet can easily be fitted into a 19" outdoor enclosure with heat exchanger. Note
that the standard cabinet has air convection holes so that it is not environmentally protected against
water or heavy dust.
Figure 39: MTS LiTE

Junction Panel

Filter section for Duplexer

and Preselector

Duplexer
Power Supply
Unit

Fan Tray

Preselector

Site Controller

Base Radio

A typical MTS LiTE Site configuration includes four major functional components:
Base Radio
Site Controller (SC)
RF Distribution System (RFDS)
Power Supply
A Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) distributes up to two Receive antennas to the base
radio (BR). The duplexer enables a duplexed Receive/Transmit function on one antenna, which further
reduces the total count on antennas per site.

76
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

MTS 1
The MTS 1 is a small, single base station designed to be wall mounted for indoor use or mast mounted
for outdoor use in larger systems. For additional capacity, two MTS 1s can be connected to work in a
dual configuration for additional capacity and resilience. The MTS 1 enclosure is dust-tight and also
protects against other environmental elements, such as water. The MTS 1 provides up to 4 channels in
a single cabinet or up to 8 channels in a dual MTS 1 configuration. A typical MTS 1 site configuration
includes four major functional components:
Base Radio
Site Controller (SC)
Duplexer with Preselector path
Power Supply Unit
The duplexer enables a duplexed Receive/Transmit function on one antenna, which further reduces
the total count on antennas per site. The MTS 1 comes with several optional accessory kits such as
solar shield for sun heat protection (for outdoor use).
Figure 40: MTS 1

MTS 2
The MTS 2 is a small, very powerful base station designed for indoor working without the requirement
for cooling fans. All modules can easily be accessed through the cabinet front door. Due to its small
size, a complete MTS 2 cabinet can easily be fitted into a 19" outdoor enclosure with heat exchanger.
Note that the standard cabinet has air convection holes so that it is not environmentally protected
against water or heavy dust.

77
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 41: MTS 2

Antenna connectors and junction panel

Preselector

Duplexer

Filter
section

Duplexer

Space for Hybrid Combiner

(not shown)

The MTS 2 provides up to 8 channels in a single 61 cm high cabinet. A typical MTS 2 Site
configuration includes four major functional components:
Base Radios
Site Controller (SC)
RF Distribution System (RFDS)
Power Supply
A Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) combines two transmit channels onto one antenna
and distributes up to three Receive antennas to the base radios (BRs). The duplexer enables a
duplexed Receive/Transmit function on one antenna, which further reduces the total count on antennas
per site. The hybrid combiner is a wide band component and does not need to be tuned on a certain
frequency.
For expansions the main modules of the MTS 2 can be reused in an MTS 4. Expansions from MTS 2
to MTS 4 do not require any modification of the antenna installation. The antenna installation can be re
used without any change and little more floor space is required for increased capacity supported by
MTS 4.

MTS 4
MTS 4 is a high capacity base station. It provides up to 16 channels in a single 143 cm high cabinet or
up to 32 channels in two cabinets.
A typical MTS 4 Site configuration includes four major functional components:
Base Radios
Site Controller (SC)
RF Distribution System (RFDS)
Power Supply

78
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 42: MTS 4

Antenna Connectors Junction Panel Filters Junction Panel

ATCC

Card
Cage

Card
Cage

A Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) combines up to eight transmit channels onto just one
antenna and distributes up to three receive antennas to multiple base radios. Duplexers enable a
duplexed Receive/Transmit function, which further reduces the total count on antennas per site. For
non-duplexed operation, the MTS 4 also comes optionally with a Tx-postfilter that allows sufficient
space for up to three preselectors. This configuration supports up to triple diversity un-duplexed with
one Tx and three Rx antennas.
The MTS 4 prime cabinet is built up out of two card cages above one another and supports up to four
base radios. For expansions up to eight base radios an expansion cabinet of exactly the same size as
the prime cabinet can be added. An MTS 4 card cage with Base Radios power supply and SC is
identical to an MTS 2 with the filter and combiner section removed.

MTS 4L
The MTS 4L TETRA/LTE Base Station provides a flexible path with the LTE feature to complement the
TETRA system. Due to the implementation of eNodeB into the TETRA Base Station cabinet, Motorola
Solutions is offering a highly flexible migration solution for TETRA operators.
The MTS4L may be installed as a TETRA base station only, but it can also include the services for the
eNodeB such as shared Backhaul, common power supply and battery backup.
MTS 4L supports TETRA Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) - the platform for secure mission critical
high-speed data services.

79
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 43: MTS4L Rack

Key features include:

• Local Site Trunking – in the event of site link failure, the base station is able to operate
independently of the mobile switching office, maintaining secure talkgroup communications.
• Non-GPS operation – supports operation in the absence of the GPS signal, ideally suited for
underground applications.
• Full redundancy of site controller and base radio subsystems, including support for automatic Main
Control Channel switching.

Redundant Base Station Site Link

The primary purpose of the Redundant Base Station Site Link feature is to have two physically
separate links to each base station. If one link is broken the other link is able to carry the traffic to the
base station. The secondary purpose is to reduce the cost of leased lines by allowing base stations to
be connected in a ring structure. When operating in a ring structure it is possible to connect base
stations by microwave links, which is normally cheaper than using leased lines from a Ground Based
Network (GBN) operator. Redundant Base Station Site Link feature includes also Satellite Links.
If this feature is introduced, the BTS connects to the MSO through two fractional E1s.

80
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Site Controller (SC)

The Site Controller (SC) manages site activity and assigns channels as requested by the Zone
Controller. When communications to the MSO are not available, the SC is also able to perform local
site trunking operation. The SC provides connection of either an E1 or Ethernet link to the MSO. The
SC terminates the permanent virtual circuit (PVC) which is originated at the core router at the MSO,
and distributes control, voice, and network management traffic to the base radios through a 10Base-2
Ethernet bus.
Figure 44: Site Controller (SC)

A second SC can be installed at the BTS site to provide active/standby redundancy. Redundant Site
Controllers are linked through a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface.
The SC also provides frequency reference and timing reference. The SC has a high stability oscillator
to provide frequency reference signaling to the base radios. The SC also includes an internal GPS
receiver which connects to a GPS antenna through an RF feeder to provide timing reference. If
redundant SCs are installed at the site, both SCs require a separate GPS antenna connection. If NTS
(Network Time Server) is present, it can be used as a secondary frequency reference.
A logical control path and logical manager path are maintained between the BTS site and the MSO.
The control path delivers control traffic between the BTS site and the Zone Controller. The manager
path delivers network management traffic between the BTS site and the network management servers.
The SC software is loaded through the Software Download (SWDL) application. The configuration
parameters for the SC are defined both through the Zone Configuration Manager and through
DIMETRA BTS (Base Transceiver Station) Service Software (TESS).

Base Radio
Each BTS base radio supports a pair of 25 kHz transmit/receive frequencies. This physical pair of
channels provides four inbound and outbound TDMA logical channels. Up to four control capable
channels can be configured in the BTS. These four channels are spanned across the first TDMA slot of
each of the four base radios installed in the first BTS rack.
The base radio supports receiver diversity. Receiver diversity provides increased talkback range by the
installation of two or three receiver modules in the base radio which are tuned to the same inbound
frequency. Two receiver diversity is standard in a BTS base radio. The three receiver diversity option
requires an additional receiver multicoupler tray to be installed in the rack to support additional inbound
lines to the base stations.

81
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

The base radio operates in the 380-460 MHz range, or in the 806-870 MHz range, depending on the
type of BTS platform that has been purchased. The base radio provides 15 Watts or 25 Watts
(adjustable) of power output to the antenna system. Typical channel spacing between transmit and
receive in a TETRA environment is 10 MHz. Therefore, a base station operating with a transmit
(downlink) frequency of 390,500 MHz typically has a corresponding receive (uplink) frequency at
380,500 MHz.
Figure 45: BTS Base Radio

The base station is able to provide air interface encryption by applying a cipher key and a user-defined
offset variable to the inbound/outbound coded traffic. To provision the base station for encryption, the
base radio is loaded locally with a secret infrastructure key through a Key Variable Loader (KVL). This
infrastructure key is used to decrypt cipher keys which are delivered over the network. The base radio
uses the appropriate cipher key (SCK, DCK, or CCK) to encrypt outbound traffic and decrypt inbound
traffic.
The BTS base station software is loaded through the Software Download (SWDL) application. This
application can load software to the entire BTS site over the network, or can load software directly to
an isolated base radio through a direct connection. The configuration parameters for the BTS base
station are defined both through the Zone Configuration Manager and through DIMETRA BTS (Base
Transceiver Station) Service Software.

Breaker Panel
The breaker panel distributes power to the individual components in the BTS rack. The breaker panel
receives two independent -48VDC inputs and has a number of breaker switches to switch power on
and off for individual components in the rack. The breaker panel is located at the top of the BTS rack.

3.3.2
Control Sites
Control sites are the locations where the users of the system (dispatchers and network managers)
access the dispatch consoles and/or the network management terminals (NMTs). A control site can
include a variety of equipment to serve its particular purpose in the system. It may have just dispatch
consoles or NMTs or it may have both depending on the requirements.

82
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

3.3.2.1
Types of Control Site
The control site components can, if required, be located at an MSO, but are usually located at a Large
Control site. The following items describe small and large control sites.

Small Control Site

A Small Control Site uses GGM 8000 as Control Site Router and can use a Conventional Channel
Gateway and a core LAN switch. If needed, the site can support patching with four conventional
channels.
Besides the fixed 10/100Mb Ethernet port the GGM 8000 needs to be equipped with the following
modules:
• WAN module for interfacing to Ground Base Network.
• Optional second WAN module for redundant WAN link interfacing to Ground Base Network.
• Optional 4-Wire E&M module for conventional channel patching.
When the Control Site Router is also functioning as a CCGW it is not possible using Multilink Frame
Relay (MFR) to increase the site link bandwidth.
Figure 46: Small Control Site

GBN

Redundant WAN Link (optional) WAN Link

Control Site Router / CCGW

LAN Switch 4-Wire

NM Client Dispatch
Console

Large Control Site

A Large Control Site uses GGM 8000 gateway and S6000 router as Control Site Routers and can use
a Conventional Channel Gateway and a core LAN switch. If needed, the site can support patching with
four conventional channels.
Besides the fixed Ethernet ports the Control Site Router needs to be equipped with the following
modules:

83
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

• E1 WAN module for interfacing to Ground Base Network.

• Optional second WAN module for redundant WAN link interfacing to Ground Base Network.
The GGM 8000 and the S6000 further supports different dual site links configuration:
• Dual links by means of two GGM 8000 gateways. Each router has a link from a single WAN
module. The links support Non MFR only.
• Dual links by means of a single GGM 8000 gateway but having two WAN modules, one per link.
The links support Non MFR only.
• Dual links by means of two S6000 routers. Each router has a link from a single WAN module. The
links support both Non MFR and MFR.
• Dual links by means of a single S6000 router but having two WAN modules, one per link. The links
support both Non MFR and MFR.
• When running dual links using two routers, then 2 or 3 LAN switches are required (applied for both
S6000 and GGM 8000).
• When running dual links using one router, then 1, 2 or 3 LAN switches are required (applied for both
S6000 and GGM 8000).
The following figures show how a large sized MCC 7500 based Large Control site may be arranged.
From a networking perspective, the large control site is just a bigger version of a medium-sized control
site supporting even more consoles due to the addition of a third core LAN switch. Note that the
Domain Controllers (DC) are optional.

84
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 47: Large Control Site: Non Redundant

GBN

WAN Link WAN Link

IP Tunneling
/ NAT
Control Site Border
Router Router
NAT NAT

LAN LAN LAN

Switch Switch Switch

CCGW CCGW

LAN
CCGW CCGW CEN
4-Wire

4-Wire

ICCS
CCGW CCGW PC
4-Wire

4-Wire

Dispatch
Console
Dispatch
4-Wire

4-Wire

Console
Dispatch Dispatch
Console Console Dispatch
Console

NM
Dispatch DC Dispatch
Client
Console Console
DC

Dispatch Dispatch
Console Console

85
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 48: Large Control Site: Redundant

GBN

WAN Link WAN Link WAN Link

IP Tunneling
/ NAT
Control Site Control Site Border
Router Router Router
NAT NAT NAT

LAN LAN LAN

Switch Switch Switch

CCGW CCGW

LAN
CCGW CCGW CEN
4-Wire

4-Wire

ICCS
CCGW CCGW PC
4-Wire

4-Wire

Dispatch
Console
Dispatch
4-Wire

4-Wire

Console
Dispatch Dispatch
Console Console Dispatch
Console

NM
Dispatch DC Dispatch
Client
Console Console
DC

Dispatch Dispatch
Console Console

3.3.2.2
Dispatch Subsystem
The MCC 7500-series Dispatch Console Subsystem consists of the MCC 7500C Dispatch Console
Subsystem and/or the MCC 7500S Secure Dispatch Console solution. The MCC dispatch subsystem
includes all the equipment necessary to support the dispatch consoles. The dispatch consoles can be
located at the MSO or can be remotely located at a control site. The figure below shows the
components in the dispatch subsystem.

86
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

The equipment consists of the MCC 7500-series Dispatch Console (and associated peripheral
hardware), the MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server (AIS) (and the associated third-party voice
logging solution), and the Analog Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW) (also known as the
conventional base station interface).
In addition, Active Directory Domain Controllers might be needed to support Domain Name Server
(DNS) and Active Directory services for the MCC 7500-series Dispatch Consoles.
NOTICE: An optional Discreet Listening PC and a replay station may be attached to the AIS.

Figure 49: Dispatch Subsystem

Master Site
ZDS LAN
Switch Zone Level Servers
UDS

Network Zone
Management Router Controller

Router
BTS w/ CCGW

WAN

Trunking Site Conventional Only Site

Console Site
Router
w/ CCGW
Replay
LAN Station
Local Analog Conventional Stations Switch
Voice Logging Solution
MCC7500 Archiving Interface
Consoles Server
Discrete
Listening

Console Site (w/ Conventional)

The MCC 7500-series Dispatch Console is Motorola Solutions high-tier radio dispatch console system.
A console dispatch subsystem consists of the following components:
• A Motorola-certified Dispatch Console PC.
• Accessories, such as headsets, speakers, desk microphone, and a footswitch.

87
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

• A logging system. (The Archiving Interface Server (AIS) and the associated logging recorders and
replay stations).
• An Analog Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW) (also known as the conventional base station
interface).
The dispatch console equipment connects directly to the radio system’s IP transport network. It uses
the IP packet protocols for passing call control data and call audio through the system. The following
figure shows a high-level diagram of how the MCC 7500-series equipment fits into the system.
Figure 50: MCC 7500 Dispatch Console Subsystem

Archiving MCC7500C MCC7500C

Replay MCC7500S MCC7500S
Station Console Console

Archiving
Ethernet
Recorder
Switch
Device

Archiving WAN
Interface Router
Server (AIS)

3.3.2.2.1
Dispatch Console PC
Each operator position in the dispatch center consists of a Motorola Solutions-certified personal
computer equipped with a keyboard and a mouse. The Dispatch Console PC runs on the Windows 10
operating system.

3.3.2.2.2
Logging System
Motorola’s logging system allows an agency to record audio transmissions as well as certain radio
events from selected talkgroups/channels in a radio system. These recordings are archived for future
playback and use by authorized users/administrators.
The main features of the logging system are listed below:
• Each recorder can be configured to record up to 256 conventional channels or trunking talkgroups
or any combination of the two.
• Each recorder can be configured to record a number of individual calls, based on a specific license.
• Through the use of agency partitioning, only authorized transmissions may be recorded and/or
accessed by the replay station.
• The logging system has replay stations that are permissions-based, allowing users to only listen to
appropriate channels/talkgoups.
• The logging system allows users to conduct searches based on criteria such as time of
transmission, channel, and other call data.
• Recordings can be copied to transferable media.

88
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

• The logging system can include multiple logging recorders, MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Servers
and replay stations.
There are three hardware devices within a logging system:
• MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server
• Third-party logging recorder servers
• Third-party replay stations
The MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server provides an interface between Motorola’s radio system and
the 3rd party logging solution hardware which allows audio transmissions and radio system events to
be recorded together with associated call data.
The MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server monitors selected group resources (channels/talkgroups)
and individual resources (radios, consoles) passes call-control information and audio to the recording
device via the LAN. The recording device utilizes a 100 Mb Ethernet port to communicate with the
MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server and records this information on permanent or transferable
media.
The 3rd party logging solution provides a GUI called AIS Administrator that allows an administrator to
choose which channels/talkgroups are to be recorded by each recorder.
The 3rd party logging solution provides a user interface capable of allowing a user to identify actions/
calls that occurred on the radio system, choose the desired call they wish to review, and play back the
audio for that call through a 3rd party logging replay solution. The 3rd party logging solution
reconstructs the playback audio from the vocoded samples that had been sent to the logging
subsystem when the call occurred ensuring that the audio quality is equal to that of the original
transmission.
The logging system can be located on a dispatch console site, or on a logging only site without
consoles. The logging site can be either centralized (colocated at the MSO) or decentralized (at remote
control site).

MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server

The MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server passes call control information and audio for each radio
system resource that the user wants to record to the logging subsystem. The call control information
passed to the logging subsystem includes identification of the talkgroup or channel transmitting,
identification of the user making the call (unit ID, unit alias), the type of call (talkgroup call, emergency
call, and so on), and other information. All this information is logged by the logging subsystem and is
available for display back to the user upon playback.
Each MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server must be paired with its own recorder.

Logging Recorder
The 3rd party logging recorder is shipped pre-installed with all the necessary software including a
Protocol Processor licensed to operate with the Motorola MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Server and
requires no direct interaction from a user or dispatcher. The recorder requires an IP address before it
can be connected to the LAN. Once connected, it stores audio transmissions, call data, and call events
from the selected talkgroups/channels on specified transferable media.
Recorders can store at least 48 hours worth of audio.

Replay Station
Audio and events which have been recorded by the 3rd party logging recorders are accessed via a 3rd
party replay station. The replay station is a networked PC equipped with a keyboard, mouse, a monitor,
and a speaker.

89
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

The replay station software displays information such as logged events and call data such as audio/
event starting time and duration of transmission. The replay station software also allows the user to
listen to audio call recordings to the user through a graphical user interface.
A replay station can access recordings on multiple 3rd party logging recorder servers, even ones which
are not being used with MCC 7500 Archiving Interface Servers. This provides the user with a complete
view of everything being recorded from a single point.

3.3.2.2.3
Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW)
Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW) is a GGM 8000 gateway configured to operate as an
interface between the DIMETRA system and the conventional system. It allows working with and
patching with conventional channels thus providing an easier transition period when going from an
existing system to a DIMETRA system.
Figure 51: GGM 8000 used for CCGW

The CCGW allows up to 4 conventional channels to be connected to the console dispatch subsystem.
At a small control site (which is a location where users access dispatch consoles and network
management terminals) only the Conventional Channel Gateway function is performed by the Control
Site Router. At all other control sites up to ten CCGWs may be installed.
Figure 52: Patching with a Conventional System
Conventional
Users

Conventional Conventional Dimetra

Channel Channel Users

Conventional
Dispatch Site

Patch Tie Lines

CCGW Site
SwMI

MCC7500
Dispatch Site

Dispatch Dispatch

90
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

3.3.2.2.4
MCC 7500 Dispatch Communications Server
The MCC 7500 Dispatch Communications Server (DCS) is designed to meet the demands of
customers who want to implement or already have implemented their own custom-developed non-
Motorola control room.
The Dispatch Communications Server subsystem provides the interface between the MCC 7500
dispatch console subsystem and 3rd party applications and systems in a Large Control site. By means
of the Console Remote API Manager Service (CRAM), customers have full access to the same feature
set as provided by MCC 7500 dispatch consoles.
From a system viewpoint, the Dispatch Communications Server subsystem:
• Provides an interface to 3rd party control rooms, also known as Integrated Command and Control
Systems (ICCS).
• Provides audio in digital form (PCM A-law).
• Provides access to Motorola MCC 7500 Console Dispatch Application Programming Interface.
The Dispatch Communications Server subsystem consists of the following hardware elements:
Dispatch Communications Server
DCS LAN Switches
DCS Routers
DCS Firewall
Terminal Server
KVM Switch
If required, network security components can be added.

3.3.2.2.5
Secure Dispatch Communications Server
The Secure Dispatch Communications Server (S-DCS) allows secure communication between the S-
DCS and the radio units in the field. Encryption/decryption is made in the endpoints, so communication
remains secure.
The Secure Dispatch Communications Server (S-DCS) subsystem consists of the following elements:
Call Control Entity (CCE) Server
E2EE Console CryptR Module
Audio Processing Entity (APE)
ICCS Gateway Multiplexer

3.3.2.2.6
Secure Dispatch System (End-to-End Encryption (E2EE))
E2EE MCC7500S console solution is developed to provide end to end encrypted communication
between radios and consoles. As illustrated in the following figure, the E2EE MCC7500S console
solution consists of three main entities:
Call Control Entity (CCE), also called Dispatch PC
CryptR
Audio Processing Entity (APE), also called Audio Module
The KVL is not used in daily operation, but only used to load security keys to the CryptR.

91
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

Figure 53: MCC 7500S Dispatch Console

X-zone

Digital Audio
Dispatch PC CryptR Adapter Headset

Site Switch

SB
U
Kinesis Footswitch
Audio USB
Module

Filter Splitter
IRR Sound Connector Cable
SB
U

Card XLR
XLR
XLR
Microphone

LLR Speakers

Secure ICCS Gateway

The Secure ICCS (Integrated Command and Control System) Gateway Subsystem provides the
interface between the MCC 7500S Dispatch Console Subsystem and 3rd party applications and
systems in a Large Control site. By means of the Console Remote API Manager Service (CRAM),
customers have full access to the same feature set as provided by MCC 7500S dispatch consoles.
Secure ICCS supports End-to-End encryption, which allows secure communication between ICCS
Gateway PC and the radio units in the field. Encryption/decryption is made in the endpoints, so
communication remains secure all the way.
The Secure ICCS MCC 7500S module consists of three physical components:
ICCS Gateway PC
Audio Module
CryptR

3.3.2.2.6.1
End-to-End Encryption (E2EE) Call Logging
E2EE Call Logging is similar to clear all logging, described previously in Logging System on page 88
with the following differences:
• E2EE Call Logging allows for the logging of encrypted calls in an encrypted format.
• CryptR handles the decryption of the calls in conjunction with a Replay Station.

92
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

E2EE Call Logging Servers

E2EE logging solution is an enhancement of the clear-only solution and handles both clear and
encrypted calls. It consists of the same components as the clear-only solution accompanied by a
CryptR device.

3.3.2.2.6.2
E2EE Discreet Listening ICCS Gateway
With the Discreet Listening ICCS Gateway feature it is possible to create a Discreet Listening function
in the ICCS. The Discreet Listening ICCS Gateway enables listening to both Clear calls and encrypted
calls through the following interfaces:
• Console Interface
• Clear Voice Interface
Figure 54: E2EE Discreet Listening ICCS Gateway

Dimetra
System

Encrypted Clear

Discreet Listening ICCS

Gateway

Control Interface Digital Audio

(MCC 7500 API) Interface

ICCS

93
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 3: DIMETRA System Components

3.4
Radios
Radios communicate with the RF sites using the TETRA standard. These radios support encryption,
authentication, and interfacing for a data terminal.

94
 MN005775A01-A
DIMETRA Data Management

Chapter 4

DIMETRA Data Management

4.1
Radio System Databases
The system uses a variety of databases to provide communication services to individual users.
Configuration data for users, talkgroups, and the system infrastructure are stored in these databases.
Other types of information stored include system performance and fault data. The databases are the
organizing element that transforms the computers and radios in the system into a versatile
communications platform.
The various databases include information concerning:
• Call Processing Information
• Fault Management Information
• Statistical Data
• Database Summary

4.1.1
Call Processing Information
The following section describes the individual databases, the relationship between the databases, and
the way the system uses the data.

User Configuration Server Database

The User Configuration Server (UCS) stores information about radios, talkgroups, critical sites,
Adjacent Control Channels (ACC), interzone control paths, and user security information for the
cluster. Group and Unit ID home zone assignments are also made at the UCS level. The UCS provides
the benefit of a single point of entry with automatic propagation of data throughout the cluster to all the
zones in the cluster. Each zone database in the cluster receives all of the information entered at the
UCS, allowing the zone databases to be used for restoring cluster-level data to the UCS if necessary.
A UCS API is available, allowing a customer-supplied provisioning system to interface with the User
Configuration Servers in all the clusters. This allows a centralized provisioning system to provide
system wide configuration capability to all the User Configuration Servers throughout the system.

Zone Database Server

The Zone Database Server (ZDS) stores information about the zone configuration such as base
stations, telephone connections, data servers, console sites, archive interface servers, alias server,
and so on.
The ZDS is managed by the Zone Data manager (ZCM).

Home Location Register

The Home Location Register (HLR) stores the current zone location of any registered individual or
affiliated group members whose configuration information is stored in the HLR. Groups and Individuals
are treated differently for mobility purposes and therefore hosted by separate processes in the Zone
Controller. These are called GHLR and IHLR respectively. The location information in the HLR is
continually updated as radios are turned on and off, roam the system, and switch between talkgroups.

95
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Visitor Location Register

Each zone has a Visitor Location Register (VLR) to address the radios and talkgroups which are
currently active in the zone. The VLR stores access configuration information for both individuals and
groups along with their current site locations. The VLR resides in the Zone Controller.

Zone Local Database

The Zone Local database, located in the Zone Controller, is a simplified text file containing much of the
same infrastructure data that is found in the zone database. The primary reason that the local
database exists is to allow continued communications within a zone in the case of a failure resulting in
a Zone Controller reset while the zone database is not available. The local database allows the
controller to provide wide area services in default mode until the HLR and VLR are restored with
records from the ZDS/UCS.

Radio Control Manager (RCM) Database

RCM Database contains radio events and radio commands monitored through RCM application. The
radio commands monitoring functions available are Radio Check, Snapshot, Zone Status, and events
for Emergency Alarm. All monitoring displays are updated in real-time as the information becomes
available in the system.

Affiliation Database
The affiliation database contains real-time affiliation and deaffiliation information for radios, talkgroups,
and sites within a zone. Tracking radio users through a zone allows you to see which sites get the most
use, how and when radio users access the system, and which talkgroups are involved in a particular
call.
The affiliation database resides on the Air Traffic Router (ATR) server. The ATR server receives radio
call traffic in raw data packet format from the Zone Controller. The raw data packets are translated into
Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA) packets by the ATR server and broadcast on the network as an
ATIA stream.
The radio call traffic information in this ATIA packet contains talkgroup and site affiliation and
deaffiliation information for each radio user in a particular zone. The affiliation database collects this
information and provides updates to PRNM management applications, such as System Health
Application Suite.

Radio User Information

Individual user permissions are provisioned through profiles that define characteristics common to a
group of users. When a new user is entered into the system, the user is assigned an appropriate profile
or profiles. Only the information unique to the user has to be keyed in.
Talkgroups are organized in the same way, using talkgroup profiles to define characteristics common
to a collection of talkgroups.
This information is initially entered into the User Configuration Manager (UCM) as a single point of
entry to avoid duplicating effort or generating mismatched databases. Then the information is
replicated to each zone database.

4.1.2
Fault Management Information
Unified Event Manager can collect integrated fault information from devices located in a zone. The
server monitors faults from each of the devices and Local Area Network equipment (switches and
routers) within the zone. It furthermore handles device discovery, supervision, and synchronization.

96
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

4.1.3
Statistical Data
The system organizes statistical information into reports.
The data is collected based on groups specified by the administrator. The groups are based on object
type, time interval, and number of intervals. For example, a collection group may be defined to collect
statistics about talkgroups. A single collection group is not, however, capable of collecting statistics
about both sites and zones – two separate collection groups would be needed. Also, a collection group
collects statistics for a single collection interval.
Historical reports are the type of reports supported by the system. They are static, not updated for each
interval. Once a historical report is generated, it does not change. For detailed information on the
Historical Reports application, see System/Zone Historical Reports on page 180.

System Statistics Server Database

Statistics concerning resource usage and allocation are kept in the SSS database. As an administrator,
you use reports generated from system statistics to make decisions concerning resource usage and
allocation.
The SSS Database is used in conjunction with the system reporting tools to provide Historical reports.
Historical reports are static and provide a snapshot of system usage for a specified time interval.
Historical reports can be manually or automatically generated.
Statistics are kept for sites, channels, zones, talkgroups, and users. Statistics are kept on call duration,
busies, and call counts.

Zone Statistics Server Database

The Air Traffic Router (ATR) takes the Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA) stream and generate flat
files with the information. The Zone Statistics Server (ZSS) database pulls this information and parses
these records to the Report Players, which run on the Network Management client.
The zone-wide statistical information in the ZSS Database summarizes call processing traffic and
generates the Historical Reports. The Historical Reports are static reports that cover a specific time
interval. The amount of historical information that can be recovered depends on the specified time
interval.

4.1.4
Database Summary
The following table summarizes the pertinent information for each database, including its function, how
it is accessed, and the server on which it resides.

Table 5: Summary of Database Administration Functions

Database Server Function

UCS Database UCS Database The User Configuration Server is used for radio
Server management as described in the following list:
• Group and Unit ID Home Zone assignments are
made at the UCS level.
• Security information and other cluster-level pa-
rameters are set in the UCS.
• Radios, talkgroups, critical sites, Adjacent Con-
trol Channels (ACC), and Interzone Control Path
IDs are configured in the UCS.

97
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Database Server Function

Zone Database Zone Database All infrastructure configuration information for a spe-
Server cific zone, along with a copy of the user configura-
tion information replicated from the UCS.
RCM Database Air Traffic Router The Radio Control Manager database carries infor-
mation that allows the user to perform several moni-
toring and control functions.
System Statistics System Statistical Used in conjunction with Historical Reports Player
Server Database Server to generate cluster wide reports. A network man-
agement client can collect historical reports from all
the clusters in the system.
Zone Statistics Zone Statistical Used in conjunction with Historical Reports Player
Server Database Server to generate zone-wide reports.
Zone Local Data- Zone Controller A copy of the local infrastructure database is down-
base loaded to the Zone Controller once the ZDS is
populated with the hardware configuration records
of the zone. This copy of the local infrastructure da-
tabase is stored in the Zone Controller to provide
wide area communication in cases where the Zone
Controller needs to re-initialize without having ac-
cess to the ZDS.
Affiliation Database Air Traffic Router The affiliation database keeps track of the sites to
which the individual radios are registered and the
talkgroups to which they are affiliated.

4.1.5
Hierarchical View
The following table shows the hierarchical listing of servers.

Table 6: Hierarchical Listing of Servers Hosting Databases

Cluster-Level Servers Zone-Level Servers

• User Configuration Server • Zone Controller (ZC)

(UCS) • Zone Database Server (ZDS)
• System Statistics Server (SSS) • Zone Statistics Server (ZSS)
• Unified Event Manager Server • Unified Event Manager Server (UEM)
(UEM)
• Air Traffic Router (ATR)
NOTICE: One of zone-
level Unified Event Man-
ager servers can aggre-
gate alarms from other
zones.

98
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

4.1.6
Application Server Interaction
As with many components of the DIMETRA system, the system application servers are highly
interdependent; they rely heavily on each other to supply critical data in support of their individual
functions.
The following figure shows a high-level flow of information between the application servers in the
system. Each interaction is numbered. See the table below the figure for definitions of each of the
numbered interactions.
Figure 55: Application Server Interactions Defined

10 23

PSMS UEM UCS

21 10 1 10 10
15
10 10

10 20
10 16 5

Domain CCGW 9
ZDS AUC SSS
12
Controller
22
17
19 10 11 2 10 10

10 24 3 4
Dispatch ZC ZC ATR ZSS
Consoles Standby Active
8
7 25 18

14 10 6 13

Client PCs BTS NTS

Table 7: Application Server Interactions

Interaction Description
Replication/synchronization of database records occurs between the
User Configuration Database (UCS) and each Zone Database (ZDS).
When changes are made to individual records in the UCM, the UCS
1 replicates the new or changed information to each of the Zone Data-
bases. The administrator can also run a synchronization command to
force the UCS to download its entire database to a particular Zone Da-
tabase Server (ZDS).
Radio (subset of UCS database) and infrastructure database export
from the ZDS to the Zone Controller. Diagnostic and fault information,
2 including fault information proxied for other devices, are sent through
this link to the ZDS. Zone infrastructure and SAC configuration data is
downloaded to ZC to form the home location register (HLR).
Raw call traffic information is passed from the ZC to the ATR which for-
3
mats the information and generates the Air Traffic Information Access

99
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Interaction Description
(ATIA) stream. The ATR generates an ATIA Log, which contains re-
cords of the call processing information that are made available to the
ATR. RCM information is passed from the ATR to the ZC.
Zone statistical data is sent from the ATR to the ZSS to compile statis-
4
tical information on a per zone perspective.
Zone statistical data is sent from each ATR, within the cluster, to the
5
SSS to compile statistical information on a per cluster perspective.
Site statistical data is sent from the BTS to the ZSS to compile statisti-
6
cal information on a per zone perspective.
Call requests, channel assignments, call terminations, and other call
processing information is passed between the Zone Controller and the
7 BTS sites. When a radio requests a call, the BTS site sends the re-
quest information to the ZC, the ZC determines how to set up the call,
and the ZC sets up all the resources needed for the call.
Call requests, channel assignments, call terminations, and other call
8 processing information is passed between the Zone Controller and the
dispatch console.
Call requests, channel assignments, call terminations, and other call
9 processing information is passed between the Zone Controller and the
CCGW.
Unified Event Manager derives its listing of system objects from data
10 received from other boxes. Device status information is derived from
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agents.
Configuration data and diagnostics commands are sent from ZDS to
11 Dispatch Consoles. Dispatch Consoles send the events and alarms to
Unified Event Manager.
Configuration data is passed from the ZDS to the ATR. Fault events
12 are sent to the ATR. Configuration data for Dynamic Shared Services
Algorithm (DSSA) is sent to the ATR.
The Network Time Server (NTS) is periodically polled for a time refer-
13
ence packet from other application servers and network components.
Each client workstation runs the Private Radio Network Management
(PRNM) Suite of applications. The following list shows the application
servers that support PRNM Suite applications:
• UCS - User Configuration Manager, Zone Configuration Manager
• SSS - Cluster wide Historical Reports, Performance Reports
14 • ZSS - Zone Historical Reports
• UEM Server - Unified Event Manager
• ATR - System Health Application Suite, Radio Control Manager
If an application server is disabled or is not available for some other
reason, the associated applications do not start, or are not able to re-
trieve or update information in the application server.
Radio Configuration Information as input to generate Session Authenti-
15
cation Information materials.

100
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Interaction Description
Infrastructure configuration data as input to generate Transport En-
16
cryption Keys.
Distribution of Session Authentication Information materials from the
17
Active AuC to the Active Zone Controller.
18 Distribution of the encryption keys from AuC to the BTS.
Configuration data is sent from ZDS to CCGW. CCGW sends events
20
and alarms to Unified Event Manager.
After installation of Zone Level Domain Controller, Active Directory
DNS records are transferred into the UCS master DNS server and re-
plicated to all ZDS servers. All Active Directory Domain Controller DNS
21
servers are DNS slaves of the UCS and ZDS Master DNS servers.
Therefore, Active Directory cannot work without UCS and ZDS connec-
tivity.
After installation of Zone or Site Level Domain Controller, Active Direc-
tory DNS records are transferred into the ZDS master DNS server and
replicated to all UCS and ZDS servers. All Active Directory Domain
22
Controller DNS servers are DNS slaves of the UCS and ZDS Master
DNS servers. Therefore, Active Directory cannot work without UCS
and ZDS connectivity.
23 Radio Control Manager data is sent from the UCS to the ATR.
The two Zone Controllers communicate with each other through a vir-
tual direct link between the two Core Servers. This connection is physi-
cally made up of a redundant link, using NIC teaming. The virtual direct
24
link is used by the controllers to notify each other of their ability to
maintain the zone in wide area trunking mode and to negotiate the
switchover, if that action is necessary.
Configuration parameters and diagnostics commands are sent from
25 ZDS to BTS. Site events and alarms are sent from BTS to Unified
Event Manager.

4.2
Server Failure Impacts
Each server performs different duties or carries specific data. The impact of server failure on the rest of
the system is dependent on the server that fails and the systems state at the time of the failure.
The table below illustrates the system capacity lost upon failure of each type of server.

Table 8: Capacity Lost When Servers Fail

Subsystem Server Capacity Lost

Network Manage- User Configura- • Prevents the UCS database restore/replication proc-
ment Subsystem tion Server ess from occurring.
• Radio information cannot be edited, default radio re-
cords are not created, and home zone maps cannot
be modified or viewed.

101
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Subsystem Server Capacity Lost

• Cluster-level parameters cannot be changed with the

User Configuration Manager (UCM) application. Syn-
chronization of infrastructure changes made at the
ZDS is not made until the UCS recovers.
NOTICE: The ability of the system to process
call requests and assignments is not affected
since the Zone Controllers can utilize the infor-
mation in their HLR/VLRs to handle call proc-
essing during this type of failure.

System Statistics Prevents the viewing of cluster wide statistics until the
Server server is available. ATR buffers the SSS data for 8
hours. If the SSS becomes available during that time, it
is able to collect and store the cluster-level statistics
from the time it was down.
NOTICE: The ability of the system to process
call requests and assignments is not affected
since the Zone Controllers can utilize the infor-
mation in their HLR/VLRs to handle call proc-
essing during this type of failure.

Zone Database • Results in the loss of most fault management func-

Server tionality; zone configuration management, affiliation
display; UCS database restore from the affected
zone and UCS database replication to the affected
zone.
• Domain Name Server (DNS) services are lost.
• Users may be able to switch to a different ZDS at the
login prompt to recover network management appli-
cation access to other zones.
• Unified Event Manager alarms for sites do not come
through.
NOTICE: The ability of the system to process
call requests and assignments is not affected
since the Zone Controllers can utilize the infor-
mation in their HLR/VLRs to handle call proc-
essing during this type of failure.

Zone Statistics • Prevents the viewing of zone-wide historical reports

Server and statistics.
• Cluster-level statistics from the zone are unavailable.
ATR buffers 8 hours of data. If the ZSS recovers in
this time, then no ATR collected statistical informa-
tion is lost. If the ZSS recovery takes more than 8
hours, only the last 8 hours of data is available. The
BTS buffer statistics for 15 minutes. In case the ZSS
do not recover within 10 minutes some periods of site
statistics are lost.

102
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 4: DIMETRA Data Management

Subsystem Server Capacity Lost

NOTICE: The ability of the system to process

call requests and assignments is not affected
since the Zone Controllers can utilize the infor-
mation in their HLR/VLRs to handle call proc-
essing during this type of failure.

Air Traffic Router • The ATIA packet data and zone statistics are no lon-
ger available.
• Devices that are dependent on the ATIA stream are
affected.
• Zone statistics upload to the ZSS and SSS are inter-
rupted. Consolidation of zone and system statistics is
delayed until the ATR recovers, or 8 hours elapse.
• Affiliation data is unavailable for the zone. System
Health Application Suite application data becomes
unavailable.
• RCM and CADI become unavailable
NOTICE: The ability of the system to process
call requests and assignments is not affected.

Unified Event • Results in the loss of fault management functionality

Manager Server for the zone.
NOTICE: The ability of the system to process
call requests and assignments is not affected
since the Zone Controllers can utilize the infor-
mation in their HLR/VLRs to handle call proc-
essing during this type of failure.

Call Processing Zone Controller • DIMETRA IP systems are installed with redundant
Subsystem Zone Controllers. If the active Zone Controller fails,
all sites in the zone go into local site trunking mode
until the switch to the redundant Zone Controller is
completed.
• Fault management is unavailable for devices whose
fault management information is proxied by the ac-
tive Zone Controller.

Console Subsys- Domain Control- • The ability to log on to the console is lost if there are
tem lers no cached credentials.
Telephone Inter- Motorola Tele- • Causes all telephone interconnect calls handled by
connect Subsys- phone Intercon- the MTIG to be ended.
tem nect Gateway
• Interconnect call requests are rejected.

103
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Chapter 5

DIMETRA Call Processing

The DIMETRA system consists of many separate pieces of hardware and software which together
form a communications network. At the highest level, the system can be looked at from two main
perspectives.
Physical, hardware-based component view
Describes how the system components work together to move the necessary control and audio
signals throughout the system to make calls happen. Using this view, you can organize the system
components hierarchically, or by subsystem.
Logical, software-based system view
Describes how the management software (in all the elements of the fixed infrastructure) and mobile
unit software work together to make calls happen. This approach provides an understanding of how
the system is configured, how the system tracks mobile units as they roam throughout the coverage
area, and how the system actually processes call requests made by mobile users.
At the center of call processing is the equipment at the MSO. This equipment provides the following
functions:
• The Zone Controller processes requests for registration, individual dispatch calls, group dispatch
calls, and telephone interconnect calls, validates the requests and assigns the necessary resources
to set up call services.
• The Network Management (NM) subsystem provides the infrastructure, radio, and user information
necessary to coordinate the resources necessary for the different types of calls.
• The network transport equipment (routers, switches) provides the IP connectivity to set up the paths
that are required for call processing to take place. The network transport equipment makes it
possible to send voice through the system as IP packets.

5.1
Configuration Information
Configuration information is the foundation upon which all other aspects of call processing are built.
Configuration information must be developed for the site, zone, and system levels, the radios, and
console positions. Configuration information is required for the system infrastructure equipment, radios,
and radio users.
There are two basic types of configuration information:
User Configuration
User configuration information consists of static or fixed user configuration.
Infrastructure Configuration
Infrastructure configuration information defines how the underlying Fixed Network Equipment (FNE)
handles signal flow. For example, this type of configuration determines which MTIG, site, and zone
resources are assigned to a call. In general, this type of configuration is handled by Motorola
Solutions personnel before and during system installation and will not be described further.

5.1.1
Static User Configuration
Static configuration information, for call processing support, is used to identify individuals and groups
that use the system and what services the system must provide to those individuals or talkgroups.
Static configuration information is entered in two places:

104
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

• The User Configuration Server (UCS) through the User Configuration Manager (UCM) application.
Within this application, records are built for radios, radio users, dispatch consoles, talkgroups, and
multigroups. Parameters that affect the operations of all radios in the system, such as site access
denial, are also entered in the UCM.
• The radios through their specific programming software.
Static configuration information may be divided into four parts:
• Home Zone assignment for individual and talkgroup IDs.
• Identification numbers and aliases for both individuals and talkgroups.
• Call services and system features allowed for that individual or talkgroup.
• Valid site settings for each individual and talkgroup.
NOTICE: Valid site settings, in conjunction with the “Site Access Denial” setting (see
Infrastructure Configuration on page 109) play an important role in mobility management
when a radio attempts to register or a group member attempts to register to a site.
The static user configuration information is referenced by the system each time a radio attempts to
register to a site and/or affiliate with a talkgroup.
IMPORTANT: Configuration information must be consistent when programming the UCS
should be consistent with the configuration information in the radios.

5.1.1.1
Default Records
The system can be configured to allow access to radios when no configuration information is available
from the UCS. These radios are assigned a default configuration record automatically on initial system
access. This default record gives them a predefined set of call services on the system. If the system is
configured to disallow default access, a radio user cannot access the system without first having
configuration information programmed in the UCS.
NOTICE: Default access allows all radio users and talkgroups to access the system with a
predefined set of permissions. Individual control of radio users and talkgroups is not possible.
This mode of operation is not recommended for use under normal operating conditions.
The zone object in the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) configures and manages the attributes
relating to a specific zone. The Zone Controllers use these parameters to allocate resources. The zone
object configuration information is replicated from the Zone Database Server (ZDS) to the User
Configuration Server (UCS).
Two of the fields in the zone object record determine whether radios are allowed to access the system
only if they have a record in the UCS, or whether they can access the system under default conditions
using a default record. The fields are called Individual Default Access Permission and Talkgroup
Default Access Permission.

5.1.1.2
Identification Numbers
ID numbers are one of the key configuration elements that must be entered into the system. Based on
the ID numbers that have been entered, the system determines the following:
• Whether the individual radio or group is allowed to register at a site.
• Which call services the individual radio or group can use.
• What system features the individual radio or group can use.
• Which zone is responsible for controlling the call (for group calls).

105
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Programming ID Numbers
Individual and group IDs information from the system fleetmap is programmed into the following areas
of the system:
• Using the UCM application, all individual and talkgroup IDs are entered in the UCS.
• Using the applicable programming software, each radio is programmed with the system ID, its
unique individual ID, and as many talkgroup IDs as needed.
NOTICE: Each console position uses one individual ID.

5.1.1.3
Home Zones
The Home Zone mapping object in the UCM application provides the capability to divide into ranges
the total number of individual and talkgroup IDs that can be used in the system and to assign the
ranges to the various zones. All of the home zone assignments for groups and individuals are compiled
into two home zone maps:
• Individuals to Home Zone
• Groups to Home Zone
For example, Zone 1 can be assigned an Individual ID range that can include IDs 1000 - 1999, and a
talkgroup ID Range that can include IDs 1-100. Zone 1 becomes the Home Zone to any radio or
talkgroup programmed with a corresponding ID from the Zone 1 individual and talkgroup range tables.
IMPORTANT: A system with a single zone requires that all individual and talkgroup IDs be
assigned to Zone 1. IDs mapped to non-existing zones cannot be used.

Home Zone mapping requires that all IDs be accounted for in the ranges used to create a map.
Whether the map consists of one range or 2048 ranges, IDs 0 through 16.777.215 must be assigned to
the map.

5.1.1.4
Radio Identification
The Radio object is used to create records that contain attributes related to the physical radio unit,
such as its unique identity, serial number, and interconnect capability. A radio record is required for
each radio accessing the system.
Objects created in an Elite dispatch operator position that need audio resources when active, such as
talkgroup objects, also require a unique identification number. The identification is programmed in the
User Configuration Manager.
The total range of identification numbers used by the system is 16.777.215. The IDs are distributed as
shown in the table below.

Table 9: Short Subscriber Identity Ranges

ID Type ID Range Description

System 0 Reserved for the system.
Individual or 1 to 13.999.999 Available for individual or group short subscriber identities
Group (ISSIs or GSSIs). Each ID can identify a unique group or in-
dividual. The same ID cannot be assigned as both an ISSI
and GSSI.

106
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

ID Type ID Range Description

Alias 14.000.000 to Available for alias short subscriber identities (ASSIs).
14.999.999
Alias or Fleet 15.000.000 to Available for ASSIs or Fleet Short Subscriber Numbers
15.999.999 (FSSNs).
System 16.000.000 to Reserved for the system infrastructure ID, gateway IDs, de-
16.777.215 fault records, and other system functions.

5.1.1.5
Radio User
The Radio User object is used to create records that identify all users on the system and their
capabilities. The object can also be used to modify existing records. A radio user record includes
specific priority levels and access rights for dispatch and interconnect. To configure a radio user, you
must know how they access the system and what capabilities they require for this access.
Radio user records rely on the replication of data between the User Configuration Server (UCS) and
the Zone Database Server (ZDS). For example, if a site is added to a specific zone in the Zone
Configuration Manager (ZCM), it cannot be configured as a valid site in the radio user record until the
information has been replicated to the UCS. If that site is deleted from the zone, the ZCM user
continues to specify it as a valid site for a radio user until the UCS is notified of the deletion.

Radio User to Radio Relationship

A radio user can be associated with a specific radio or the radio user can take advantage of the
RUA/RUI feature (Radio User Assignment/Radio User Identity). If not using RUA/RUI you associate
the user with a radio by entering the ID of the radio into the radio user record. This relationship
between the radio user and a radio allows you to change which radio a user may be attached to at any
particular time. When using the RUA/RUI feature the radio user is able to pick up any radio and
register with DIMETRA network using Radio User identity and a six-digit PIN. This feature also allows
the dispatcher to assign a new radio to a certain radio user and have the user confirm that it is the
correct radio.

5.1.1.6
Profiles
A profile is a master list of common attributes or capabilities used by radio users, talkgroups, and
multigroups. Creating a profile allows you to enter the information one time and reference the profile
from an individual record. One does not have to enter the information separately into each record. You
can create a different profile for each type of function and group of users in your system, up to a
maximum of 2000 profiles.
Using a profile helps to reduce the amount of data that has to flow through the network between the
UCM and the Zone Controller. Profile information includes data that relates to radios, radio users, and
talkgroups who perform the same function. For example, all radio users associated with the Fire
Department require the same resources, so you can use a profile to create a master file for their
records.
A record can have a one-to-one relationship with a profile (up to the 2000 profile limit), or many records
can be mapped to the same profile.

Radio User Capabilities Profile

The Radio User Capabilities Profile object defines access parameters for radio users such as:
• Group/Private Call Priority Level

107
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

• Announcement Call Enabled

• Private Call (PC) Enabled
• Group Call Enabled
You can use a Radio User Capabilities Profile object to define a set of parameters that are common to
a specific group of radio users. Every radio user is assigned a Radio User Capabilities Profile.

Radio User Valid Sites Profile

Radio User Valid Sites Profile object is used to define a list of specific sites in the system the radio user
has permission to access. Every radio user is assigned a Radio User Valid Sites Profile. You can use a
Radio User Valid Sites Profile record to define a set of sites that are common to a specific group of
radio users.

Radio User Interconnect Profile

The Radio User Interconnect Profile object defines interconnect call capabilities for radio users. Every
radio user is assigned a Radio User Interconnect Profile. You can use the Radio User Interconnect
Profile record to define a set of parameters that are common to a specific group of radio users.

5.1.1.7
Templates
A template provides the means to configure a record that can be applied to radio users who need the
same set of system access parameters. Templates consist of a combination of attached profiles and
parameters set directly on the record.

5.1.1.8
Configuration Updates
During system operation, updates are sometimes needed to an existing user configuration information.
Changes to a radio user configuration are entered in the UCS. Once entered, the changes are copied
to the ZDS in each zone during the database replication process. Each ZDS then distributes the
applicable Home Zone information to its Zone Controller; the Zone Controller uses this information to
populate its Group Home Location Register (GHLR) and Individual Home Location Register (IHLR).

5.1.1.9
Talkgroup
The talkgroup object consists of information that identifies a group of radios that communicate and
interact together on the system. Talkgroup and multigroup IDs are selected from the same range of
valid IDs that are available for the individual IDs.
The total range of identification numbers used by the system is 16.777.218. The IDs are distributed as
follows:
• ID 0 is reserved by the system and cannot be assigned to a radio, console resource, or group.
• 1 - 9.999.999 are valid individual or group IDs.
• 10.000.000 - 13.999.999 is the DIMETRA extended range for individual or group IDs.
• 14.000.000 - 16.777.214 is reserved.
• 16.777.215 is used for site-wide calls for addressing all units.
• 16.777.216 is assigned to the SZ$INIT record.
• 16.777.217 is assigned to the SZ$DEF record.

108
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

TG/MG Capabilities Profile

The TG/MG (talkgroup/multigroup) Capabilities Profile object defines the capabilities for a talkgroup or
multigroup. You can use the TG/MG Capabilities Profile record to define a set of parameters that are
common to a specific talkgroup or multigroup.
Each TG/MG Capabilities Profile contains capability parameters that can be customized per configured
profile. Every talkgroup and multigroup is assigned a TG/MG Capabilities Profile. For more information
on Talkgroup/Multigroup Capabilities Profiles, see the User Configuration Manager manual.

5.1.1.10
Object Group
Object Group allows to identify a group in the Object Call feature. The Object Group number consists
of the prefix and the object number, which further consists of two parts – Subject and Instance. This
gives the possibility to distinguish between different groups working with the same subject or to
distinguish several instances of a subject. For more information, see the Call Processing and Mobility
Management manual.

5.1.1.11
Barring of Incoming/Outgoing Calls
The BIC/BOC feature allows to control the permissions of radio users to initiate or receive calls from
certain talkgroups. To configure this feature, create a Barring Profile, which specifies the subset of user
IDs (SSIs) for which calls will be barred. BIC/BOC can control incoming or outgoing individual calls,
group attachment, and group call requests. For more information, see the Barring of Incoming/
Outgoing Calls manual.

5.1.1.12
Multigroup
The Multigroup object is used to create records that identify a group of talkgroups that are the target of
multigroup announcements.

TG/MG Valid Sites Profile

The TG/MG Valid Sites Profile object defines which sites the talkgroup or multigroup has access
permission for in the system. Every talkgroup and multigroup is assigned a Valid Site Profile. You can
use the TG/MG Valid Sites Profile record to define a set of sites that are common to a specific
talkgroup or multigroup.

5.1.2
Infrastructure Configuration
The system object in the UCM configures parameters at the system level. These parameters are
common for every zone and may affect all radios in the system. The system record is created when the
system is staged for testing at the Motorola facility. Subsequently, the record can be opened to modify
the fields that affect operation of the radios in the system. This record includes the system
identification, access control timers such as the duration of the message timer for various types of
calls, and maximum call duration for group or private calls.
Another field included in this record is the Site Access Denial Type. This field works in conjunction with
the Radio User Site Access Profile and TG/MG Site Access Profile records. Site access can be
allowed or denied to Radio Users and TG/MG through the corresponding Site Access Profile record.
The setting chosen for the Site Access Denial field in the system record has a direct impact on radio
unit mobility.

109
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

The type of rejection depends on the valid sites set for each radio and affiliated talkgroup in the
corresponding UCM records. For example, with a site access denial setting of BOTH, if you have a
Radio User that is valid at the site but a talkgroup that is not valid, the radio is allowed to register and
stay at the site. The radio is allowed to make unit-to-unit calls but requests for a talkgroup call are
rejected.
Continuing this example, if the mobile user switches to another talkgroup, the radio unit sends another
affiliation request, which is accepted or denied based upon the valid site setting for that group. If it is a
valid group, the system begins to provide both group and individual call services at that site.
Valid site and site access denial are the means by which a system manager can specifically control the
operating sites and individual/talkgroup services for each radio.

5.1.2.1
Source Site Adjacent Control Channel
The Source Site Adjacent Control Channel (ACC) object in the UCM provides a means to define which
sites are in close RF proximity to any given site. ACCs allow a radio to learn about the control channel
frequencies, current availability status, and service capabilities of nearby sites. The radios use this
information for ranking potential control channel candidates that can be used in the event that the
control channel of the current site becomes too weak for acceptable use. Radios attempt to move to
one of the adjacent sites based on the control channel ranking.
IMPORTANT: System engineers create the Source Site ACC record when configuring the
system initially. Subsequent users can only open and modify the existing record. Consider the
ramifications when changing the initial configuration.
In large systems, the radio codeplug may not contain all of the frequencies for adjacent sites to which
the radio may need to roam. Additionally, new sites may be added to the system and it may be
impractical to bring all of the radios in for reprogramming.
IMPORTANT: Selection and programming of the adjacent sites lists requires detailed
knowledge of the systems coverage characteristics. Random selection of sites can severely
impact system operation as radios may experience problems accessing the system.

5.2
Mobility Management
Mobility Management encompasses the system tasks which track where every active individual and
group member is located at any time. It utilizes the information supplied by the static configuration and
the information supplied by the radios as they register, access, and move about the system.
Individual radios must register at sites in the system. This allows them to make and receive individual-
based call services. In addition, radios affiliate with a talkgroup so that they can participate in talkgroup
calls and utilize other group-based call services.
The system determines whether to accept or deny a registration/affiliation request based on
configuration settings which are programmed into their UCM records and in the radio itself. Mobility
management is the primary function performed by dynamic user configuration.

5.2.1
Mobility as Viewed by the Radio
To a radio, the system is simply a collection of control channels and sites. The radio constantly
monitors its RF environment, and automatically switches to the best site available based upon received
signal strength, internal programming, and responses to registration and affiliation requests sent to the
FNE.

110
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.2.2
Mobility as Viewed by the Fixed Network Equipment
The Fixed Network Equipment (FNE) has two functions in mobility management:
• To respond to the registration/affiliation requests from radio units.
• To track the current zone/site location of each registered individual radio unit and each affiliated
talkgroup member.
To respond to registration/affiliation requests from radio units, the FNE in a zone where the unit is
registering needs a copy of the access control information for that individual and/or group. The FNE in
each zone also needs a place to store the site location of unit and group member.

5.2.3
How the Location Registers are Created
The system uses a distributed processing architecture that shares the call processing load between the
Zone Controllers in the different zones. To enable this, the responsibility for storing (and using) the
configuration information is also spread among the zones in the cluster. Each individual and group ID
is assigned to a zone, based upon ID ranges, in the home zone mapping object in the UCS.
The zone assigned to a particular ID is said to be the home zone of this ID. The home zone to which
an ID is assigned has an impact on how the system operates. Home zone assignment affects system
operation in the following ways:
• Configuration information is distributed throughout the system based on the assignment of the
home zone to a given ID. A Zone Controller stores only the configuration information for those
individual and group IDs that are home to that zone.
• For group call services, the home zone of the group is always the controlling zone for the call,
regardless of the zone where the group member is currently registered. Depending on
configuration, this can impact the number of interzone calls versus the number of single-zone calls
that take place in the system. This, in turn, can affect the number of interzone resources that are
needed between any two pair of zones.
User configuration information is entered in the appropriate objects in the UCS: Radio and Radio User
for individuals, Talkgroup and Multigroup for groups. Once entered, user configuration information is
replicated automatically to each zone in the cluster, where it is stored in the master database of a
zone. The replication process makes it possible, if needed, to use any zone to promote its copy of the
user configuration information back to the UCS in the cluster.
Next, based on the home zone mapping, each zone transfers the configuration information for its
individuals and groups to the Home Location Register (HLR) in the Zone Controller. The home zone
mapping information is replicated to each zone from the UCS in the form of map tables. There are two
map tables: an individual to home zone map and a group to home zone map.
Whenever any individual or group configuration information is needed by any zone, it gets that
information from the HLR in the home zone of an individual or a group.

111
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Figure 56: Home Location Register

UCS

ZDS ZDS

Zone Zone
Controller Controller
IHLR IHLR

GHLR GHLR

Zone 1 Zone 2

The HLR stores access configuration information for both individuals and groups along with the current
site location of the individual or group member. The VLR is a temporary copy that is placed in the zone
where the radio is also present, and is deleted when the radio is shown up in another zone. When a
radio is shown up in another zone, a new VLR is created again.
NOTICE: There are two VLRs - one for individuals and one for groups. The individual VLR
stores the access configuration information and current site location for each registered
individual radio unit in the zone. The group VLR stores the access configuration information for
a group that has affiliated members in the zone along with the site location of each affiliated
member.
Figure 57: Home Location Register - Visitor Location Register

UCS

ZDS ZDS

Zone Zone
IHLR IHLR
Controller Controller
IVLR IVLR

GHLR GHLR
GVLR GVLR

Zone 1 Zone 2

NOTICE: All operator positions monitoring a talkgroup and the logging recorders assigned to a
talkgroup affiliate with the system. Thus, operator positions and logging recorders have entries
in a VLR of the zone.

112
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.3
Call Processing
Call processing is the term used to describe the sequence of processes that service a call request of
the radio user. Call processing can be divided into the following phases:
• Call request
• Call setup
• Audio routing
• Call continuation
• Call teardown

5.3.1
Controlling Zone
Assignment of controlling zone for interzone call services is based on the type of call. For multizone
individual calls, the zone location of the radio that first transmits audio becomes the controlling zone for
the call, while the zone of the call recipient becomes the participating zone. A participating zone is any
zone containing one or more users involved with a call controlled by another zone. When a talkgroup
member requests a call that requires more than one zone, the controlling zone receives
acknowledgments from all participating zones before the call is granted. Resource allocation is invoked
by a request sent from controlling zone to all participating zones. The acknowledgment from a
participating zone is only sent if resource allocation is successful. For talkgroup calls, the home zone of
the talkgroup (as defined in the GHLR in the home zone of a group) becomes the controlling zone, and
all other zones with talkgroup members become participating zones. Throughout the duration of the
call, all control data and audio is routed from the zone of the originator to the controlling zone, then the
audio is routed from the controlling zone to all participating zones. The controlling Zone Controller is
responsible for managing the call and organizing all participating Zone Controllers into the call.
The following table lists the components and equipment required to process a call request.

Table 10: Call Processing Equipment

Component Function
Zone Controller The Zone Controller processes service requests, location informa-
tion, outbound commands, and maintains the HLR/VLR databases.
The HLR and VLR are used to determine access rights and location
of the radios and talkgroups. Other Zone Controller databases pro-
vide information on site availability. One of its Ethernet connections
is used to link with network management servers through the core
LAN switch.
The stored information makes it possible for the Zone Controller to
reestablish wide area trunking in a single zone system and inter-
zone trunking in a multizone system. The HLR and VLR use the de-
fault records after a Zone Controller reset to allow the radios to op-
erate in the system while the radio database is being restored from
the ZDS. A copy of the local infrastructure database is downloaded
to the Zone Controller once the ZDS is populated with the hardware
configuration records of the zone. This copy of the local infrastruc-
ture database is stored in the Zone Controller to provide wide area
communication in cases where the Zone Controller needs to re-initi-
alize without having access to the ZDS.

113
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Component Function
The Zone Controller uses Ethernet technology for the site link, inter-
zone link, and link with the telephone interconnect device.
Site Link
The Zone Controller uses this link for control and management
information from/to the sites.
Interzone Link
A Zone Controller uses this link to send and receives control and
management information from other Zone Controllers. The inter-
zone links are established through an exit router (using the CWR
patch panel).

Gateway routers Serve as the routing path for call processing control information and
become the RP for Zone Controller to RF site control paths (SCPs).
In multizone systems the gateway routers also serve as the RP for
IZCPs. In the ESL solution the gateway router functionality is collo-
cated with the first core router.
Core routers Act as the distribution point for audio, control information, and net-
work management traffic destined for the same zone sites. The core
routers are deployed in pairs, with each router connecting to the
same CWR patch panel via high-density cables. When a pair of
core routers is connected to a CWR patch panel, the routers are re-
ferred to as CWR (cooperative WAN routing) peers. The core rout-
ers become the RP for audio routing in the system due to the multi-
cast address sent by the Zone Controller. Information is transmitted
within IP packets.
Exit routers Act as the distribution point for audio, control information, and net-
work management traffic destined for other zones. Like the core
routers, the exit routers are deployed in pairs, with each router con-
necting to the same CWR patch panel via high-density cables.
When a pair of exit routers is connected to the CWR patch panel,
the routers are referred to as CWR peers. Information is passed as
Frame Relay packets from the exit routers across the WAN infra-
structure to other zones (via CWR patch panels). In the ESL solu-
tion the exit router functionality is collocated with the first core rout-
er.
Exit routers also provide high-speed Intra-MSO connectivity be-
tween LAN Shares via the third Ethernet port. For more information
turn to Multi-LAN Sharing on page 41.

Backhaul switch A pair of Backhaul switches per MSO is used to aggregate the IP-
sec and IP-IP tunnels for BTS site, control site, and inter-MSO links.
Core LAN switch Provides the backbone for the routers within the master site to pass
IP traffic. The Zone Controller communicates over this switch to
reach the network management servers for radio and interzone in-
formation, to reach the core routers and exit routers for intrazone
and interzone transmissions, and select the MTIG resources for au-
dio conversion and distribution to the console operator and tele-
phone interconnect.
CWR patch panels The CWR patch panels provide the connection between the core
and exit routers and the E1 WAN infrastructure. Core and exit rout-
ers are configured in pairs to provide path redundancy for audio and
control packets. With Cooperative WAN Routing (CWR), the pair of

114
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Component Function
routers work cooperatively to control the CWR patch panel, which
switches non-redundant E1 links between the two routers in groups
of 12. Each pair of CWR core or exit routers is connected to a relay
panel via high-density E1 ports. The CWR patch panel’s RJ-48C
connectors provide the connection to the E1 network.
MTIG The Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway (MTIG) operates
under the direction of the Zone Controller to vocode audio between
ACELP and A-law or Mu-law PCM and to route this audio between
the IP network and the E1 or Ethernet connecting to the customer-
supplied PABX. The MTIG also generates any required tones for
telephone interconnect operation and provides a gateway path for
the control signaling between the Zone Controller and the PABX.
TETRA Site Controller Serves as the site interface to the wide area infrastructure. Re-
(TSC) ceives and transmits control, audio, and management information.
Accomplishes the Frame Relay - Ethernet conversions.
BTS Base Radios The BTS base radios provide the RF interface between the radios
and the system.

5.4
Call Types
The following sections describe several types of voice calls that can be made through the DIMETRA
system. The examples are divided between two main types of call services:
Group-based Calls
Group-based calls are services that provide for effective group (one-to-many) communication.
Individual Calls
Individual calls are services that provide for effective individual (one-to-one) communication.

5.5
Group-Based Services
The DIMETRA system offers several types of group-based services:
• Talkgroup Call
• Announcement Call
• Emergency Services
• Site Wide Calls
• Talkgroup Scanning

5.5.1
Talkgroup Call
The talkgroup is the primary level of communication in a trunked radio system. Most of the
conversations a radio user participates in are talkgroup calls. The following describes in detail call
processing for a talkgroup call. Two variations are shown:
Intrazone Call
A talkgroup call where all resources are within one zone.
Interzone Call
A talkgroup call where resources are in more than one zone.

115
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.5.1.1
Intrazone Talkgroup Call
This is the most common type of call. Home zones are generally assigned to match up to geographic
areas where radios are used most frequently, such as a patrol district or management area. When
possible, talkgroups and radio users should be configured so that the majority of the calls take place
within this geographic area, thus reducing the need for interzone resources.

5.5.1.1.1
Intrazone Call Request
A talkgroup call begins with a call request. The call request resolution determines whether the call is
set up or not. A talkgroup call request is initiated when the caller selects the appropriate mode on the
radio and then presses the PTT button.
• When the caller presses the PTT button, the call request, in the form of U-SETUP is sent over the
Common Control Channel to the current site. The information is passed to the Site Controller for
processing and sending to the Zone Controller through the site router.
• The Zone Controller, for the zone where the request originates, determines if this is a valid call
request by checking the access configuration information stored in the VLR. If it is a valid request,
the Zone Controller checks its talkgroup-to-home zone map table to see which zone is the home
zone of the talkgroup. For group calls, the home zone of the group becomes the controlling zone for
the call, regardless of which zone the caller is in when the request is made.
Figure 58: Intrazone Talkgroup Request from a BTS Site

Dispatch Gateway Zone

Console Router Controller

LAN Switch

Core
Router

BTS Patch Panel BTS

5.5.1.1.2
Intrazone Call Setup
Once a valid call request is received, the Zone Controller starts to set up the call:
• The Zone Controller checks the VLR to determine talkgroup affiliations and radio location. This
information indicates which sites need to participate in the call.
• The Zone Controller checks that all needed resources, such as channels at sites and consoles are
available to establish the call. For details, see Busy Call Handling on page 138.

116
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.5.1.1.3
Intrazone Call Grant
Use the following process to see how to grant talkgroup calls.

Process:
1 Routing information is sent to the appropriate MSO and remote sites.
2 The Home Zone for the call request sets up a core router as the distribution point for the audio
information. This audio focal point is known as the Rendezvous Point (RP) and its router
becomes the Rendezvous Point router. The Rendezvous Point for intrazone audio is the core
router.
3 Channel assignments are sent to the needed RF sites.
4 The Site Controllers in the BTS sites configure the channels for audio transmission, broadcast
the channel assignment, through the main control channel (MCCH), to the radios, and send a
join message to the RP at the MSO.
5 The sites cause the activation of the receive and transmit circuits in the designated traffic
channels.
6 The receiving radios tune to the assigned traffic channel at their respective sites.
7 The requesting radio electronically activates its transmitter.

5.5.1.1.4
Intrazone Talkgroup Call Audio Routing
The following process explains voice communications, when the call is set up.

Process:
1 When the radio user speaks into the microphone of the radio, the radio converts the speaker's
analog audio into ACELP and transmits the signal to the assigned traffic channel.
2 The audio signal is transmitted by the radio over the assigned frequency to the caller's site and
received by the assigned traffic channel.
3 The traffic channel places the audio into the site's Ethernet LAN as IP packets and routes the
audio signal through the site router to the assigned rendezvous point router (core router) at the
MSO.
4 The rendezvous point router forwards the audio to any device from which a join message was
received.
5 The talkgroup members already locked on to the traffic channel receive the audio.

5.5.1.1.5
Intrazone Talkgroup Call Continuation and Teardown
When the original speaker releases the PTT button, a control message is sent over the traffic channel.
This message is extracted from the audio stream by the remote site and forwarded to the Zone
Controller.
NOTICE: Control information flows continually during a call: over the control channel during call
setup and embedded in the digital audio signal during the active call phases.

Process:
1 When the speaker releases the PTT button, a message is sent to the controlling Zone
Controller. If the call is message trunked, a message hangtime timer starts when the message is
received. All system resources, previously assigned to the call, are held available during the
timer's hangtime period.

117
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

2 If a person responds to the initial caller, by pressing the PTT button within the hang timer period,
the call continues. The message hang timer is reset and the new speaker's audio is routed as
the source audio using the traffic channels and router assignments already allotted for this call.

5.5.1.2
Interzone Talkgroup Call
The difference between an interzone call and an intrazone call is the other Zone Controllers that must
be included in the call control process. In an interzone call, each zone controls its local resources in a
similar manner to the previously described intrazone call. However, because the controlling zone must
coordinate with the needed participating zones before granting the call, there is much more activity
during the call request and setup phases.

5.5.1.2.1
Interzone Talkgroup Call Request
The call request is sent by the radio over the control channel at the local zone and site when the radio
user presses the PTT button. This request is relayed through the remote site to the local Zone
Controller.
Based on the talkgroup ID information in the call request, the Zone Controller receiving the request
checks its VLR and determines if the requester is able to make the call. The Zone Controller then
checks the talkgroup-to-home zone map and determines if it is the home zone (and thus the controlling
Zone Controller) for the call.
If it is the home zone, the local Zone Controller becomes the controlling Zone Controller and takes
responsibility for the call. The call request is acknowledged, and the controlling Zone Controller begins
to set up the call. If the receiving zone is not the home zone, the call request is passed on to the
appropriate Zone Controller, which accepts control of the call and becomes the controlling Zone
Controller for the call (see the following figure).
Figure 59: Interzone Call Request
Zone 1 Zone 2
Dispatch Gateway Zone Gateway Zone
Console Router Controller Router Controller

LAN Switch LAN Switch

Core Exit Exit Core

Router Router Router Router

BTS Patch Panel Patch Panel Patch Panel BTS

5.5.1.2.2
Interzone Talkgroup Call Setup
The controlling Zone Controller determines which zones must be included in the call and sends a
message to the appropriate Zone Controllers, requesting their participation in the call. All interzone call

118
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

control messages between any pair of Zone Controllers goes over the Interzone Control Path between
those two zones. There is an active Interzone Control Path between any two zones in the system.
Each Zone Controller checks its VLR to determine which sites, along with which fixed resources,
should be included in the call, and if all the resources are available to set up the call. The call is busied
if any zone cannot participate due to lack of resources. If all the resources are available, the
participating Zone Controllers acknowledge their participation back to the controlling zone.
When all participating zones acknowledge the call request, the controlling Zone Controller grants the
call. The grant message is sent to each participating zone through its active Interzone Control Path
with the controlling zone. At this point, each zone is responsible for setting up the resources within its
zone.
Within each zone, the Zone Controller:
• Assigns traffic channels at the appropriate sites within its zone.
• Assigns the necessary audio resources and sends multicast addresses.
• Notifies the consoles of the talkgroup call and its audio source, if needed. The Zone Controller
relays the audio assignments and the channel assignments to the appropriate remote sites through
their site control paths.
• Once the resources are assigned, the rendezvous point router becomes the center of control for
audio distribution.
At each site, the Site Controller:
• Activates the site assigned as the traffic channel.
• Sends the traffic channel assignment to the affiliated radios over the control channel.
The assigned traffic channel at RF sites sends a join message to the RP after they receive the
multicast address.
As resources are set up in each zone, the radios in the talkgroup in each zone switch to the assigned
traffic channel. The initiating user's radio activates the transmit circuitry and begins sending the audio
to the receiver at the assigned traffic channel.

5.5.1.2.3
Interzone Talkgroup Call Audio Routing
When the transmitting user speaks into the microphone, the audio signal is transmitted on the assigned
traffic channel frequency and received by the site, which routes the audio stream to the core router at
the local MSO. The core router relays the audio signal to the assigned sites through their remote site
router, to the consoles and over the assigned interzone resources to the exit routers in the participating
zones. The exit routers in the participating zones then route the audio to the core LAN switch, the core
router, gateway router, consoles in their respective zones, and the assigned sites. The sites transmit
the signal to the members of the target talkgroup.

5.5.1.2.4
Interzone Talkgroup Call Continuation and Teardown
When the original speaker releases the PTT button a control message is sent over the traffic channel.
This message is extracted from the audio stream by the remote site and forwarded to the controlling
Zone Controller. In transmission trunking mode, the call is ended after the PTT released message is
received. In message trunking mode, however, the controlling Zone Controller starts the message
hangtime timer upon reception of the PTT released message. If another user in the talkgroup responds
to the call within the hangtime period, the controlling Zone Controller receives the new call request
(either from a site in its zone or from a participating Zone Controller), sees that it is for a talkgroup that
has an active call, and continues the call using the resources currently assigned to the talkgroup. The
audio source is the only resource change in this instance.

119
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

The call is ended when no one from the talkgroup keys-up within the message hangtime period. The
controlling Zone Controller sends a message to each participating zone to tear down the call. Each
zone goes through the teardown process, disabling the audio and marking the resources used in the
call as available for other call assignment.

5.5.1.2.5
Roaming During a Talkgroup Call
When a receiving radio user in an active talkgroup call roams into a new zone, the call is continued
automatically. Depending upon whether resources, such as a traffic channel, are available to set up the
call at the new site, the roaming user experiences the following conditions:
• If resources are available at the new site and the talkgroup call is already active in the new zone
(there are talkgroup members at sites within the zone), the roaming user experiences a short loss of
audio while the call is set up at the new site.
• If resources are available in the zone to set up the call but the talkgroup call is not active (there are
no affiliated talkgroup members in that zone), the roaming user experiences a longer loss of audio
while the interzone call setup process takes place. The access control information needs to be
transferred from the home zone HLR to the HLR in the new zone and from there to its VLR, the call
request validated in the new zone, and a channel assigned and activated at the new site.
• If resources are not available at the site or in the zone, the call continuation request to the new zone
is placed in its busy queue. When the needed resources become available, the roaming user rejoins
the call in process. A longer loss of audio occurs in this case.

5.5.2
Object Call
The Object Call is a feature that allows to communicate with a talkgroup which is not permanently
configured in the radio. A user on a radio terminal is able to call a group they are not member of, stay
in the group, and push-to-talk into the group when needed. The radio requests attachment and
temporary calls (group calls without being attached to the talkgroup) on object groups using private call
signaling and the Switching and Management Infrastructure (SwMI) recognizes such Object Call
requests by prefixes in the target number. Talkgroups defined for use with Object Call are called Object
Groups for short. Object Groups are defined in a 2-dimensional structure and for each dimension the
feature implicitly generates container talkgroups consisting of all the Object Groups sharing property in
that dimension. Thus, any Object Group is part of 2 such container groups.
For more details see, the Object Call manual.

5.5.3
Announcement Call
An announcement call involves all the radios assigned to a multigroup. A radio or dispatch console can
initiate the announcement call selecting the multigroup. Any radios affiliated to any of the talkgroups
assigned in the multigroup receive the call. Audio for an announcement call is routed through the
infrastructure in the same manner as a talkgroup call.
IMPORTANT: The multigroup and all talkgroups in the multigroup must have the same home
zone assignment.

NOTICE: All call requests in the busy queue for the affected radios are dropped.

Multigroup information is programmed in two places:

• One Multigroup per personality can be programmed in the radios.

120
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

• Multigroup records must be created in the UCM database identifying the Multigroup itself as well as
the individual talkgroups associated with that Multigroup.
A radio unit with the selector in the Multigroup mode position can monitor talkgroup activity for
talkgroups associated with the selected multigroup if and only if the monitored talkgroups have an
affiliated member in the same zone as the monitoring radio. The system does not pass audio between
zones exclusively for a unit that is scanning talkgroup activity while in multigroup mode.

Multi-Select (MSEL) and Patch Calls

Multigroup calls can also be set up dynamically by dispatch operators by using the multi-select (MSEL)
and patch features. The MSEL feature allows a dispatch operator to drag talkgroup icons into a
resource window. The dispatch operator is then able to transmit to all the selected talkgroups
simultaneously. The call to each talkgroup is then terminated when the dispatch operator releases the
PTT.
The patch feature allows a dispatch operator to assign talkgroups to a patch resource. The patch
remains in effect until the dispatch operator explicitly terminates the patch. Each time a radio or
dispatch operator transmits to the patched talkgroups, a call is established with all the patched
talkgroups.

5.5.4
Emergency Services
There are two types of emergency services:
Emergency Alarm
A radio to console or Radio Control Manager (RCM) function that is sent over the control channel.
Emergency Call
A radio or console call function.

Emergency Alarm
When the emergency button on a radio is pressed, an emergency alarm is transmitted through the
control channel. This alarm is forwarded to any consoles monitoring the radio's currently selected
talkgroup or multigroup. Any RCM positions that are active, and have the currently selected talkgroup
or multigroup as part of their list of attachments, also receive and display the emergency signal. If an
RCM User is configured to receive "unattended emergency alarms", they may receive emergency
alarms from radios whose talkgroups or multigroups are outside of their list of attachments, if there is
no other RCM User online to receive the emergency alarm. The radio can be configured to enter
emergency call mode automatically when the emergency button is pressed.

Emergency Call
An emergency call is a specialized, high-priority version of a talkgroup or announcement call.
Emergency calls always have the highest priority in the system. When an emergency call request is
made, the request takes priority over any other type of call request. The emergency call can be
programmed in the radio as tactical or revert. When programmed as tactical the call is made on the
radio's currently selected talkgroup or multigroup. When programmed as revert, a talkgroup ID that
identifies the user's emergency talkgroup must be programmed in the radio.
If a traffic channel is not available at the requestor's site, ruthless preemption is used to assign a traffic
channel. The lowest priority call at the site is terminated, and the traffic channel is granted to the
emergency caller.
An emergency call is routed to all affiliated talkgroup or multigroup members, including all console
positions and logging recorders affiliated to talkgroup or multigroup. All needed resources for receiving
sites are ruthlessly preempted.

121
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Once an emergency call is granted, it is handled by the system as a talkgroup call although emergency
calls are message trunked with their own longer hangtime timer setting. The range for this timer is 0 to
3660 seconds, the default message hangtime for an emergency call is 30 seconds.
NOTICE: A value of 3660 disables the message timer for emergency calls. Radio Users have
unlimited time between PTTs.
A console operator can initiate an emergency call on any talkgroup or multigroup being monitored. The
system handles a console emergency call request the same as a radio-generated request, with one
exception: a console generated emergency call has an unlimited hangtime, so the call stays active until
the operator “knocks down” the emergency call at the operator position.
NOTICE: Emergency calls initiated from the console are always processed in Ruthless
Preemption mode when resources are not available to grant the call immediately.

5.5.5
Site Wide Calls
A site-wide call involves all the radios registered with a particular site at the time of the call. A site-wide
call reaches the radios registered with the site regardless of their talkgroup affiliations. Only dispatch
consoles can initiate a site-wide call.

5.5.6
Talkgroup Scanning
Talkgroup Scanning and Priority Group Monitoring are closely related features. Priority Group
Monitoring is an attribute of a TG defined within the infrastructure. A Priority Monitor TG can pull a user
monitoring another TG call with a lower priority as defined within the radio unit, out of the call.
Talkgroup Scanning is a best effort service in the radio, where the radio monitors talkgroup activity on
a configurable list of groups at the site where the radio is registered. When no group activity exists for
the MSs selected TG or associated multigroup and the radio is either idle on the MCCH or active on
the PDCH and a call is initiated to a TG defined in the active scan list, speech is heard in the
loudspeaker of the radio unit and the call is monitored. When a radio is active on the PDCH the data
transfer is interrupted to join the group call and resumed when the group call ends. Note that a radio
unit only receives call setup request for scanned groups if another radio at the same site has attached
to the TG as it’s selected TG or if the site is configured as a critical site for the TG. When the radio is
on the PDCH, another radio is required to be active on the PDCH at the same site and attached to one
of the scanned groups as its selected TG before the setup is signaled on the PDCH.
While monitoring a call, the radio unit responds to a new call setup to TGs in the active scan list, to the
radios selected TG and associated multigroup, if the setup is to a group with higher scanning priority
than the monitored call. The group identity of the TG being monitored is displayed in the radio unit's
display. Note however that group calls are only signaled on the TCH of another call, when the new call
is configured as a Priority Monitor group or the group call is an emergency call.
During an active call, the monitoring user may wish to participate in the call. When the monitored call is
the selected TG (affiliated group) or associated multigroup of the served user, the operation of PTT
results in a transmission request (normal operation) to this TG. However, for all other monitored calls,
operation of PTT only results in a transmission request to the monitored TG when the radio is
configured to "TalkBack" to the current active group call.
Since scanning is always a best effort service at the radio, the end user should make a critical group its
selected group. If groups are critical as far as the system administrator or network operator is
concerned, these groups can be configured as Priority Monitor groups in the UCM and critical sites can
be defined in the UCM as required when setting up the group call.

122
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.5.7
Active Talkgroup Scan
The Active Talkgroup Scan feature allows radios to receive audio for up to 30 talkgroups without the
need for an affiliated talkgroup member to be located at the same site as the scanning radio. The
feature is by default disabled and can be enabled in the User Configuration Manager (UCM).

5.6
Individual Call Services
Individual call services are available through the DIMETRA system and they include: Private Call,
Direct Individual Call, and Emergency Individual Call. The controlling zone is determined in a manner
different from that used for group-based calls for this type of call service. In an individual call, the
controlling zone is determined by the first radio to transmit audio.
The following contains a description for each of the individual-based calls available in the DIMETRA
system and describes the call process operations.
NOTICE: In individual calls, the initial call request goes over the control channel. An audio
channel is not assigned until the target radio responds to the initial request. Audio channel
resources are assigned once the target radio responds to the call request.
Private Calls
Allow radios in the same system to enter one-to-one conversations – either full-duplex (both parties
able to send and receive audio at the same time) or half-duplex (only one party able to send the
audio at a time).
Direct Individual Calls
Allow both parties to enter a conversation immediately after the connection establishment, without
the ringing phase or need to manually pick up an incoming call.
Emergency Individual Call
The Emergency Individual Call (EIC) feature functions as an extension of a standard Private Call
with an additional use of the emergency call mechanism. An incoming Emergency Individual Call is
accompanied by visual and sound notifications. Additionally, the feature allows the user to establish
an immediate EIC with a predefined radio or console user.

5.6.1
Private Call Request
The following figure graphically represents a private call request within a single zone. Note that it is
also possible to make private calls across zones.

123
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Figure 60: Private Call

Gateway Zone
Router Controller

LAN Switch

Core
Router

BTS Patch Panel BTS

A private call begins with a call request. The call request resolution determines whether the call is set
up or not. Requests are rejected if the target radio does not respond to the request or if the target radio
is not registered with the system. Other reasons for a call to be rejected would be configuration-related
(one of the radios blocked from private calls, site not allowed, and so on).

5.6.1.1
Private Call Request Flow
This process explains a private call request.

Process:
1 A private call request is initiated when the caller selects the appropriate mode on the radio, and
then enters the target radio's ID or selects it from a list.
2 When the caller presses the PTT button (semi-duplex) or presses the send button (full-duplex),
the call request is sent over the control channel to the current site. The information is passed to
the Site Controller for processing and routing to the Zone Controller at the initiator's MSO.
3 The Zone Controller receiving the call request checks its VLR to see if the requesting individual
is configured to make private calls.
4 If the call is allowed, the Zone Controller checks its individual VLR to see if the target radio is
currently registered in the zone, and if it is, at which site.
5 If the target radio is active (registered) in the same zone, the Zone Controller sends it a private
call request over the control channel at its current site.
NOTICE: If the target radio is not in the current zone, the caller's Zone Controller
determines the target radio's home zone by checking its individual-to-home zone map.
6 The caller's Zone Controller sends a message to the target radio's home Zone Controller
requesting the current location of the target radio (which the home Zone Controller gets from its
individual HLR).
7 Once the target radio's current zone is known, the receiving Zone Controller sends the call
request to the Zone Controller in that zone.

124
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

8 The target radio's Zone Controller checks its individual VLR for the target's site location and
sends the call request to the target radio through the control channel at its current site.
9 If the target radio is not registered with the system, the requester receives a call reject.
Otherwise, the requester hears a ringing tone. If the target radio does not respond within the
time-out period, the call request is ended.
10 If the target radio responds to the call request, the private call is set up.

5.6.1.2
Intrazone Private Call Audio Flow, Call Continuation, and Teardown
This process describes the situation in which the private call connection is already established. For
details, see Private Call Request Flow on page 124.

Process:
1 Audio is received by the assigned traffic channel at the local site and is routed to the RP at the
zone.
2 The RP routes the audio packets through the exit routers where they get encapsulated as Frame
Relay packets for transmission to the participating sites.
3 When the target user responds, the same path is used, but the source and destination of the
audio are swapped.
4 For semi-duplex calls, the call is terminated when neither party responds within the defined
message hangtime. Full-duplex calls are terminated when either party presses the end button.

5.6.1.3
Roaming During a Private Call
The DIMETRA system supports call continuation during roaming for private calls. When a non-
transmitting radio user roams to a new site during a call, the audio is redirected automatically to the
new site. The radio user experiences a brief interruption of the audio when moving to another site
within the same zone. The audio interruption when moving to a site in a new zone may be slightly
longer.
NOTICE: A transmitting radio user in an active individual call cannot roam automatically. When
a transmitting radio fades out (due to moving away from the current site), the system detects
the loss and begins the call termination process.

5.6.1.4
Full-Duplex Private Calls
Radios or dispatch consoles can initiate full-duplex private calls, allowing both parties to
simultaneously transmit and receive audio. Full-duplex private calls are supported for radio-to-console,
console-to-radio, and radio-to-radio. For a radio to initiate a full-duplex private call, it must be
configured with permission to do so through UCM.
For full-duplex private calls, there is no hang timer that determines when the call is terminated. The call
is initiated when the radio presses the send button, and the call terminates when one of the parties
presses the end button. Full-duplex operation is simulated in the radio by switching between the uplink
and downlink channels within each TDMA frame.

5.6.2
Telephone Interconnect
Telephone interconnect capability allows radio and console users to initiate and receive full-duplex
calls through a connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network or customer Private Automatic

125
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Branch Exchange. Besides the usual system infrastructure, telephone interconnect service requires a
Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway, and customer-supplied Private Automatic Branch
Exchange.
Figure 61: Telephone Interconnect in E1 networking

To PABX Dispatch
MTIG-E1 Console
Zone Gateway
Controller Router

EC

LAN Switch

Core
Router

Patch
Panel
BTS

The telephone interconnect feature builds upon all of the configuration and infrastructure discussed up
to this point. With talkgroup calls and unit-to-unit calls, all parties to the conversations all reside
somewhere on the DIMETRA system.
For telephone interconnect calls, one of the parties is outside of the DIMETRA system and is
connected through landline telephone to the radios in the system.
NOTICE: The DIMETRA system supports radio-to-landline and landline-to-radio interconnect
calls. It does not support interconnect calls to and from talkgroups.

5.6.2.1
Relationship between Components
The Zone Controller uses call control client software to interface with call control server software
running on the Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway. The call control server software translates
the Zone Controller’s commands into a format compatible with the PABX and forwards them to the
PABX. In this way, the Zone Controller communicates to the PABX so that telephone interconnect calls
can be made from radios to the PSTN, and from the PSTN to individual radios.
In addition to audio transcoding, the Telephone Interconnect subsystem supports the generation of
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) overdial tones (touch-tone), and other messaging tones (end-of-
call warning). It is done using tone generation client and server software installed on the Motorola
Telephone Interconnect Gateway. The MTIG is used for the tone generation, since digital radios
cannot generate their own overdial tones (touch-tones). The tone generation capability is essential for
accessing automated voice mail systems, or other types of automated resources in the PABX/PSTN
network.

126
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.6.2.2
Configuration
Radios must be properly programmed to make and receive telephone interconnect calls.

5.6.2.2.1
Limiting Access to Interconnection Services
Telephone interconnect services are intensive users of system resources. Each call requires a single
channel which is dedicated for the duration of the call, and telephone calls typically last longer than
talkgroup calls. Because of this fact, and because of direct toll costs, it is essential that you have the
ability to limit the use of this feature.

5.6.2.2.1.1
Limiting Interconnect Calls Through Radio and User Configuration
Radios can be programmed so they can receive telephone interconnect calls, but not initiate them.
Radios can also be programmed with specific call lists (telephone numbers) and configured to prevent
users from calling non-programmed telephone numbers.

Individual Interconnect Profiles

Each radio is assigned an interconnect profile (the Radio User Interconnect Profile object in the UCM).
The profile is created in the UCM and assigned to the radio user. Your system may have various
individual interconnect profiles available for assignment to radio users.
One of the settings in the individual interconnect profile specifies a Priority Level. The system uses
priority levels to determine the assignment of system resources during busy periods. There are ten
levels of priority available, levels 1 through 10. The highest priority, level 1, is reserved for emergency
calls. A telephone interconnect call can be assigned a priority level 2 through 10, depending on
individual requirements. Level 2 is the highest assignable priority, while level 10 is the default priority
setting.
For more information on how busied calls are handled by the system, see Busy Call Handling on page
138.

5.6.2.2.1.2
Limiting Interconnect through Infrastructure Configuration
In addition to individual radio programming, the infrastructure can be configured to limit telephone
interconnect services. This can be done through the Shared Service object and the Zone object in
Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM).

Enabling or Disabling Interconnect Based on Shared Service

The Shared Service feature is a more sophisticated method of balancing telephone interconnect
capability with dispatch traffic. Two types of shared service are available:
Table-Driven Shared Service
A standard feature that allows the system manager to specify the maximum number and duration of
interconnect calls which are allowed at any given time for each site. This is done using the Level of
Service (LOS) object in the ZCM. A number of LOSs can be configured with different settings for
maximum numbers and maximum duration of calls. These levels of service can then be assigned
individually for two-hour time blocks throughout the day in the Shared Service object of the ZCM.
Each site is configured with its own table.
Dynamic Shared Service
A feature that expands the table-driven shared service functionality. Dynamic shared service
provides an automatic adjustment to the configured table-driven shared service tables according to

127
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

current system loading. DSS allows you to create more flexible telephone interconnect usage
patterns which can be saved as different Levels of Service (LOS). These dynamic levels of service
can then be assigned individually for two-hour time blocks throughout the day in the Shared Service
object of the ZCM. Each site is configured with its own table.

Limiting Interconnect Call Duration at the Zone Level

The Maximum Interconnect Call Duration timer is set in the Zone object of the ZCM to control the
duration of an interconnect call. Before the interconnect call exceeds this time, an alert tone is
generated to indicate that the call is about to end. When the warning period expires, the interconnect
call is terminated.

5.6.2.2.2
Call Setup Restrictions
The following is a list of call setup restrictions:
• The request for an interconnect call is placed in the busy queue if the radio initiates the call and no
channel resources are available.
• If no MTIGs are available, interconnect calls are busied until one becomes available. This means
that the call is placed in a queue and can be active as soon as an MTIG becomes available.
• Regardless of the infrastructure configuration, user limitations, or channel availability, programming
of the radio can prevent interconnect calls from being attempted.
• If shared service dictates that an interconnect call needs to be placed in the busy queue, the call is
placed in the queue, even if there is a channel available at the site.

5.6.2.2.3
Radio-to-Landline Interconnect Calls
Radio-to-landline calls are initiated with a request that includes all dialed digit information for the call.
This allows the system to check dialing restrictions before granting the traffic channel for the call.
Restricted phone numbers results in a denial of the interconnect call request.

5.6.2.2.3.1
Call Setup
This process describes the events that occur during the setup of a successful radio-to-landline call.

Process:
1 The radio user initiates a telephone interconnect call according to how this is done on the
specific type of radio.
2 The radio sends a telephone interconnect service call request over the control channel with the
dialed digits information.
3 The system verifies that the radio is authorized for telephone interconnect service.
4 The system determines which zone's telephone interconnect is used for the call. The location of
the Motorola Telephone Interconnect Gateway determines the controlling zone for the call, the
point where the multicast addresses originate, and the location of the RP for the call.
5 Radio system resources are assigned to the call. The resources include the site where the radio
is located, a gateway router for distribution to the network, resources in the MTIG for audio
conversion between ACELP and PCM, and for timeslot or speech channel access to the
external network.
6 The Zone Controller sends two multicast addresses, one for the receive side of the call and one
for the transmit side. Transmission of the multicast addresses sets up the audio RP.

128
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

7 The MTIG and sites send a join message to the RP for the assigned multicast addresses.
8 The system checks the telephone number dialed to verify that the number represents a valid
telephone number and that dialing restrictions allow the radio to initiate calls to the dialed
telephone phone number.
9 A PABX-to-PSTN resource is selected for the call.
10 The PABX initiates the call to the PSTN.
11 Radio system resources are granted for the call.
12 The radio switches to the traffic channel.
13 The caller hears a ringing tone to indicate that the call is being placed.

5.6.2.2.4
Landline-to-Radio Interconnect Calls
A telephone user initiates a landline-to-radio call by calling an access number. The system
automatically locates the target radio or console, regardless of the radio or console's current zone
registration, and routes the call through the network to the target radio. The radio or console must be
registered in a site which is in wide-area trunking.

5.6.2.3
Telephone Interconnect Call Continuation/Call Maintenance
When a radio-to-landline or landline-to-radio interconnect call is established, the radio moves over to
the assigned traffic channel for the duration of the call. If necessary, the radio can move to the control
channel to perform special functions, such as a fade condition, or to send a request to cancel the
interconnect call.

5.6.2.4
Telephone Interconnect Call Termination and Call Teardown
Either the radio, a console or the landline party can terminate a telephone interconnect call by hanging
up. Either party is able to terminate the interconnect call when the call is in the active state, or at any
point during the call setup process.
An active call can be terminated by the system in the following cases:
• The duration of an interconnect call exceeds a configured call duration limit.
• Emergency group calls occur.
• Priority monitored calls occur.

Radio-Initiated Termination During Active Interconnect Call

The system can accommodate call termination requests sent on either the control channel or the traffic
channel. Motorola Solutions brand radios send these requests over the control channel.
If the radio is turned off during an interconnect call (active call, or while in a call setup state), the radio
automatically cancels the interconnect call before deregistering from the system and powering down.

Landline Initiated Termination During Active Interconnect Call

When the landline caller hangs up during an active interconnect call, the MTIG notifies the Zone
Controller to terminate the call.

129
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

System Initiated Interconnect Call Termination

The system can terminate a telephone interconnect call that exceeds one of the system timers. This is
controlled by setting the Maximum Interconnect Call Duration timer in the Zone object in Zone
Configuration Manager (ZCM) , in conjunction with the shared services configuration and current
system loading. The system also disconnects an interconnect call if the participating radio does not
rekey within a set time period.
• Before automatic call termination, the system notifies both parties using an end-of-call warning tone.
• After a set interval of time (set by the Interconnect Final setting in the Zone Configuration tab in
Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM), the call is terminated.

5.6.2.5
Roaming During a Telephone Interconnect Call
A radio can roam from one site to another during an interconnect call. This can occur during an active
call, while the call is being set up, or while in a queued state.
The following describes how roaming affects an active interconnect call, an interconnect call in a call
setup state, or an interconnect call in the process of being terminated. For each scenario, there are
several possibilities that can occur once the radio has roamed to the new site, depending on variables
such as resource availability at the new site, and whether the radio is “valid” for this individual call
activity at the new site. It is assumed that the radio has previously performed a full registration on the
system.

Roaming During an Active Interconnect Call

If a radio roams during an active interconnect call, the following actions take place:
• The Zone Controller determines whether the radio is valid for individual services at the new site,
and that the new site is capable of interconnect service.
• If the required resources at the new site are available, the Zone Controller grants the call
immediately.
• If the required resources at the new site are busy, the Zone Controller places the call in a busy
queue. The landline user is not notified about the busy condition of the call.

Roaming During Queuing of Telephone Interconnect Call

If the Zone Controller determines that the required resources are not available during the setup of a
radio-to-landline or landline-to-radio call, the call is dropped.

Roaming While Ringing for Landline-to-Radio Call

If the radio roams while ringing for a landline-to-radio call, the call is dropped.

5.7
Packet Data Services
The DIMETRA system supports the packet data feature, allowing mobile data terminals to
communicate through the DIMETRA infrastructure to data hosts located in customer enterprise
networks. A data gateway can be installed in each zone to provide control and routing services for
packet data traffic.

130
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Figure 62: Packet Data Services

Customer Enterprise
Network

RADIUS
Server
Data
Host

DHCP
Server

Border Data Gateway

Router GGSN Gateway Router

RNG PDG

LAN Switch

Data Core
Terminal Router

Patch
Panel
BTS

The RNG provides the necessary encapsulation between the radio network and the PDG. The RNG
also provides the logical link connection and any necessary compression to deliver the outbound
packet data traffic to the appropriate destinations. The RNG hosts the packet data visitor location
register (PD-VLR). The PD-VLR contains mobility information and packet data channel assignments (if
applicable) for all the packet data users that are currently registered in the zone. The RNG receives
updates to the PD-VLR from the Zone Controller.
The PDR provides encapsulation of traffic between the RNG and GGSN, provides mobility
management of all packet data users that are home to the zone, and provides access control
according to the HLR/UCS settings. The PDG delivers outbound traffic to the RNG with the appropriate
destination address. The PDG hosts the packet data home location register (PD-HLR). The PD-HLR
contains all the packet data service permissions and configuration for packet data users that are home
to the zone. The PDG receives updates to the PD-HLR from the zone database server.
The GGSN provides separation between the infrastructure and the customer enterprise network. The
GGSN provides IP tunneling through a border router to the customer enterprise network.

131
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

The border router operates in the DMZ, which is a less secure portion of the network. The border
router provides the direct connection to the CEN. If a data user is operating outside their home zone, or
if a data user is accessing a CEN which is in another zone, then a peripheral network router is also
used to route the data-related traffic across zones.
The border router operates in the DMZ, which is a less secure portion of the network. The border
router provides the direct connection to the CEN.

5.7.1
Initiating Packet Data Service
Process:
1 The data terminal initiates the request for packet data service by establishing a Point-to-Point
protocol (PPP) connection with the radio. The data terminal sends information including its static
IP address (if applicable), the access point name (APN) for the packet data host, and challenge
handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) if RADIUS authentication is being used.
2 The radio requests access to a packet data channel (PDCH) at the BTS site. The radio sends
the request along with its assigned resource allocation group (RAG).
3 The Site Controller evaluates the resource allocation group for the radio and assigns a packet
data channel which is configured to operate with the resource allocation group of the radio.
4 The radio sends the packet data request information over the PDCH, and the request is received
by the radio network gateway (RNG) in the data gateway. The RNG forwards the request to the
Packet Data Router (PDR).
5 The PDR checks the permissions for the radio according to its locally stored packet data home
location register (PD-HLR). The PD-HLR includes permissions and settings that have been
defined through UCM. If packet data services are permitted for the radio, the PDR forwards the
request information over a GTP tunnel to the GGSN.
6 The GGSN establishes an IP tunnel to the customer enterprise network according to the APN in
the request. This IP tunnel provides delivery of packet data traffic between the DIMETRA IP
network and the customer enterprise network. This tunnel originates at the GGSN, runs through
the border router, and terminates at the customer enterprise network.
7 At the customer enterprise network, a DHCP server assigns a dynamic IP address to the data
terminal if the terminal does not have a static IP address. If RADIUS authentication is supported,
then a challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP) and password authentication
protocol (PAP) are negotiated between the RADIUS server and the data terminal to ensure that
both parties are genuine.
8 The packet data host establishes contact with the data terminal and packet data traffic between
the data host and the remote data terminal can flow across the infrastructure.

5.7.2
Data Prioritization
Data Prioritization allows high-priority messages to be delivered faster regardless of the current loading
of the data channel. The feature works by assigning a relative priority to each datagram. This enables
the datagram queue in the PDG to be reordered based on the priority of the individual datagrams. The
priority is set on an application basis. This ensures that datagrams from critical applications that do not
utilize much bandwidth can be transmitted successfully to the individual radios.

132
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.7.3
Multislot Packet Data
Multislot Packet Data Channels (PDCH’s) are configured in the Network Manager as the number of
Multislot PDCHs and their width (number of timeslots) at the site. The site then requests the required
channels from the ZC and assembles the multislot PDCH from the acquired channels.
Based on the overall load at a site the width of a multislot PDCH can change dynamically. This can
happen for several reasons:
• The SC can resize multislot PDCHs based on the overall channel utilization to optimize the use of
system resources and mminimize the risk of queuing voice call in the ZC or preempting data
channels for higher priority services. The operation is that the SC decreases the width of a multislot
PDCH to a configured minimum and frees up resources in the ZC in case of high load/channel
utilization at the site and increased the width as the channel utilization decreases.
• In case of a higher priority service being initiated and no resources available the ZC can preempt a
data channel. In this case, the SC resizes the multislot PDCH to free up the channel so that it can
be used for the higher priority service as requested by the ZC.

5.7.4
Dynamic Data Channel
The most resource efficient way to implement the TETRA Packet Data Service is usually to provide
dedicated packet data channels. However, it is also possible to share channels between voice and
data traffic. These shared channels are known as Dynamic Data Channels and are normally dedicated
for the DIMETRA Packet Data Service, but they can be preempted by the following categories of voice
calls: emergency calls, Preemptive Priority Calls, or calls for talkgroups that have been specifically
enabled to preempt the dynamic packet data channel. Dynamic Data Channels are particularly
effective at making efficient use of traffic resources for smaller systems, systems with a relatively light
requirement for packet data, or where the packet data requirement fluctuates with time. Note that
Dynamic Data Channels are also known as Semi-static PDCH.

5.7.5
End-to-End Encryption (E2EE) Packet Data
End-to-End Encryption is an overlay service that allows secure (digitally encrypted) data
communications between radios and data applications in the customer enterprise network (CEN). The
primary use of this feature is to provide encryption from wireless data modems to a point inside the
CEN for data devices such as GPS receivers and other data applications.
Encryption/decryption services are provided by the system endpoints, which for E2EE PD is provided
by the Packet Data Encryption Gateway (PDEG). Only an endpoint that shares the encryption key and
encryption algorithm is able to decrypt the transmission successfully. Other devices that do not have
the proper key are not able to receive intelligible information.
IMPORTANT: The encryption key is vital to the security of the DIMETRA secure system. If the
key become known to groups or individuals outside your organization, they can decode your
data traffic or even gain unauthorized access to the network. You must therefore ensure that
the encryption key is kept secret.
The radio and the PDEG data encryption key, can be centrally managed using a Key Management
Facility server (KMF) in the CEN.

133
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

5.8
Short Data Services
The ATS application is a purchasable optional software that can be used in a system to send text
messages of maximum 1000 characters in ASCII or 500 characters in Unicode from a host to a display
on a radio and conversely. For these messages a consumed report can be requested. Also broadcast
messages can be sent to Individuals and Groups in selected regions.
Short data traffic can be delivered concurrently with voice traffic or packet data traffic.
Figure 63: Short Data Services

Gateway Data Gateway

Router (SDR)

LAN Switch LAN Switch

Core Exit Exit Core

Router Router Router Router

BTS Patch Panel Patch Panel Patch Panel BTS

5.8.1
Initiating Short Data Services
Process:
1 The radio, remote data terminal, or host creates a message, selects the Short Subscriber
Identity (SSI) of the recipient, and sends the message. If a radio is sending the short data
message, the message is delivered over the control channel.
2 The short data message is delivered to the short data router (SDR) within the cluster.
3 The SDR observes the SSI for the recipient of the message and checks the IHLR/VHLR
information to determine where the recipient is located.
4 The SDR routes the short data message across the network to the intended recipient (host or
radio).

5.8.2
Short Data Store and Forward
The Short Data Store and Forward service (S&F) enables hosts and radios to communicate with each
other without the requirement to be available at the same time. For example, if the destination radio is
not available, S&F functionality ensures that the message is delivered later, once it becomes available.
The S&F functionality is provided by the Store and Forward Server (SFS) hosted on the SDR, together
with the SDTS and SDR functionalities. This service is intended to be used for administrative and non-

134
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

tactical intelligence messages (such as passing on information at a shift change, or distributing

information when employees return from a leave). The S&F feature requires a license.

Prevent Store and Forward

This feature allows to prevent the Store-and-Forward (S&F) of specific SDS message types, without
having to configure each subscriber separately. A list of blocked SDS message types based on their
Protocol Identifiers (PIDs) can be configured in ZCM for each SDR. For information how to configure
this feature, see the Zone Configuration Manager manual.

5.8.3
SDS in Local Site Trunking
Short Data Services in Local Site Trunking feature enables a stand-alone base station working in LST
mode to provide basic Short Data Services. This feature allows radios within one site to communicate
with SDS messages. More detailed information about the SDS in LST can be found in the Data
Subsystem manual.

5.8.4
End-to-End Encryption (E2EE) Short Data
The primary use of this feature is to provide encryption from wireless data modems to a point inside the
CEN for data devices such as text message recipients.
Encryption/decryption services are provided by the system endpoints, which for E2EE SD is provided
by the Short Data Encryption Gateway (SDEG). Only an endpoint that shares the encryption key and
encryption algorithm is able to decrypt the transmission successfully. Other devices that do not have
the proper key are not able to receive intelligible information.
IMPORTANT: The encryption key is vital to the security of the DIMETRA secure system. If the
key become known to groups or individuals outside your organization, they can decode your
data traffic or even gain unauthorized access to the network. You must therefore ensure that
the encryption key is kept secret.
The radio and the SDEG data encryption key, can be centrally managed using a Key Management
Facility server (KMF) in the CEN.

5.9
Authentication and Air Interface Encryption
The DIMETRA system supports authentication and air interface encryption to provide a level of security
against different threats to the system such as theft of service, impersonation, Denial of Service
attacks, and eavesdropping. Authentication and air interface encryption options in the DIMETRA
system include the following solutions:
• Authentication only
• Authentication and air interface encryption (using TEA1)
• Authentication and air interface encryption (using TEA2)
• Authentication and air interface encryption (using TEA3)
If a system includes both authentication and air interface encryption, either service can be enabled or
disabled. The DIMETRA system allows the following modes of system operation:
• Authentication enabled and air interface encryption enabled
• Authentication enabled and air interface encryption disabled
• Authentication disabled and air interface encryption enabled

135
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

• Authentication disabled and air interface encryption disabled

5.9.1
Authentication
Authentication is used to verify that a radio accessing the system is valid, and to reject any
unauthorized parties from accessing the system. The DIMETRA system uses a challenge-response-
result protocol to authenticate both the radio and the infrastructure.
The authentication process begins with the infrastructure sending a challenge to the radio. The radio
calculates a response based on the challenge, and sends the response to the infrastructure. If the
response from the radio equals the expected response by the infrastructure, then the infrastructure
indicates that the authentication result is successful and grants access to the system. If the response is
not correct, then the infrastructure indicates that the authentication result has failed and rejects access
to the system.
When the radio provides the response described above, and the radio supports mutual authentication,
the radio also provides a challenge to the infrastructure. The infrastructure generates a calculated
response to the radio to verify that it is genuine. If the infrastructure's result matches the result
expected by the radio, then the radio indicates that the authentication result is successful to the
infrastructure. On receipt of this successful indication, the infrastructure grants access to the system.

5.9.2
Air Interface Encryption
Air interface encryption provides security for RF signaling between the infrastructure and radios. Air
interface encryption is achieved by using a common encryption key in both an infrastructure base
station and a radio, allowing the devices to encrypt traffic and decrypt traffic from one another. Air
interface encryption can be applied to control, voice, and data traffic. Options can be purchased to
support TETRA Encryption Algorithm 1 (TEA1), TETRA Encryption Algorithm 2 (TEA2), or TETRA
Encryption Algorithm 3 (TEA3).
The transmitting station uses the key and an offset value in an algorithm to encrypt the stream of
traffic. The receiving station uses the same key and offset value through an algorithm to decrypt the
stream of traffic. A proportion of the MAC header for the packets remains clear throughout the
encryption process.

5.9.2.1
Security Classes
DIMETRA security is defined in terms of class. Each class has associated, mandatory or optional,
features. Security classes and features associated with them are presented in the table.

Table 11: Security Classes

Legend:
M Mandatory
O Optional
- Does not apply
† Recommended

Class 1 2 3 3G
Authentication O O M1 M1
OTAR O3 O M2 M2
SCK - M O O

136
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Class 1 2 3 3G
Encryption

CCK/DCK En- - - M M
cryption
GCK - - - M
Enable/Disable O O O† O†
1 Authentication is required for generation of DCK.
2 OTAR for CCK is mandatory, for other keys management OTAR mechanism is optional.
3Required if key material is either distributed in preparation for security class transition, or during
cell reselection to a cell of a different security class.

Security Class 1 (SC1)

A system operating as being Security Class 1(SC1), refers to a system operating with no air interface
encryption at all.

Security Class 2 (SC2)

A system operating as being Security Class 2 (SC2), refers to a system operating with SCK air
interface encryption and TM-SCK OTAR or DM-SCK OTAR. If a system is prevented from running SC2
then a radio is not granted access when SC3 is not possible, see Security Class 3 (SC3) on page 137.

Encryption with the Static Cipher Key (SCK)

The base stations and radios are provisioned with 32 Static Cipher Keys (SCKs). The system uses one
SCK at a time, and broadcasts the number of the SCK (SCKN) that is currently being used in the
system, between 0 and 31, to the radios. The radio selects the appropriate SCK (from its provisioned
list of SCKs) to decrypt traffic from the infrastructure.
The base station and radio use the SCK along with an offset value to encrypt and decrypt traffic from
one another. SCK is used as a fall back encryption scheme when DCK/CCK air interface encryption is
not possible (for example, no authentication service, during site link failures, during interzone link
failures, and so on). The SCK is also used when the authentication option is not installed or enabled.
DIMETRA supports a dynamic key change of SCK over the air interface using an On-The-Fly (OTF)
mechanism.

Security Class 3 (SC3)

A system operating as being Security Class 3 (SC3), refers to a system operating with DCK and CCK
encryption, with TM-SCK used as fallback.

Encryption with the Derived Cipher Key (DCK)

The Derived Cipher Key (DCK) is generated as a result of the authentication process, providing a
unique encryption key for the radio. After authentication, the radio stores its calculation of DCK and a
copy of DCK is stored in the infrastructure.
The base station and radio use the unique DCK along with an offset value to encrypt and decrypt traffic
from one another. DCK is not used for group calls. However, DCK supports group call services by
allowing over-the-air rekeying of the Common Cipher Key (CCK) that sent to radios to use for
encryption of group calls.
DCK can only be used when authentication is installed and enabled in the cluster. A new DCK is
created each time the radio authenticates with the system.

137
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Encryption with the Common Cipher Key (CCK)

The Common Cipher Key (CCK) is used to encrypt traffic for group calls. All radios registered on a cell
share the same CCK for group calls.
When an authenticated radio registers it requests that the infrastructure sends the current CCK (sealed
with DCK) for use in protecting group calls and providing encryption of address identities. The radios
decrypt CCK using their local calculation of DCK (from authentication).
The Base Station and radio use the CCK along with an offset value to encrypt and decrypt traffic from
one another. Identities used across the air interface are also encrypted using CCK. The system
changes CCK daily.

Security Class 3G (SC3G)

A system operating as being Security Class 3G (SC3G), refers to a system operating with GCK and
DCK/CCK encryption. In this mode, encryption functionality is identical to the previous one with the
addition that one or more talkgroups may use a dedicated Group Cipher Key (GCK).

5.10
Busy Call Handling
The following describes how the system modifies the calling process to handle situations where
resources are not available at the time a call request is made.
A call request that cannot be granted the needed resources at the time the request is made is “busied”
and the request is placed in the busy queue of the controlling Zone Controller.
Calls are placed in the busy queue in the order in which they are received. However, each call type has
a priority setting that influences the order in which calls in the busy queue are evaluated. Higher-priority
calls are evaluated before lower-priority calls. Calls of equal priority are evaluated on the basis of the
order in which they were placed in the queue.

Priority Levels
Priority levels are used by the system to determine the assignment of system resources when multiple
calls are competing for system resources. Emergency calls always have the highest level of priority.
There are ten levels of priority:
Level 1
The highest priority. Reserved for emergency calls. Level 1 cannot be assigned to any other call
types.
Level 2-10
May be assigned to talkgroup, individual, or telephone interconnect calls. Level 2 is the highest
assignable priority, while level 10 is the default priority setting.

Group Call Busies

Two calling features determine when group (talkgroup and multigroup) calls are busied: AllStart and
FastStart™.
These calling features are assigned to the groups in User Configuration Manager (UCM) application.

Private Call Busies

Private calls are placed in the busy queue if the required resources for the call, including encryption,
are not available at the time of the request.
NOTICE: When a private call is busied, the priority that is assigned to the call in the queue is
determined by the better of the target or individual priority of the requestor. For example, if the
target's priority is 8 and the priority of the requestor is 5, then the call is queued with priority 5.

138
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

Private calls can have a priority level assigned that determines how the call request is serviced in the
busy queue, the higher the priority, the sooner the call gets serviced.

Typical Reasons for Rejects

When a radio requests a particular service, the Zone Controller can choose to grant the request, reject
the request, or respond with a busy signal. When a service is granted, the Zone Controller assigns the
appropriate resources and sends a message to the requestor granting the service. When the Zone
Controller rejects a request, the Zone Controller sends a reject message to the requestor. When the
Zone Controller is experiencing a busy situation, the Zone Controller sends a busy signal to the
requestor.
When a radio has been rejected from using a particular service, the Zone Controller sends an abort
message to any resources that need to be released from the service, then sends a reject message to
the radio. The following items are typical reasons why a radio may be rejected during registration or
during a call request.
• The radio may be sending an individual ID or talkgroup ID that is not loaded in the memory of the
Zone Controller.
• The radio may be requesting a service that is restricted or not available to the particular radio.
• The system or the receiving radios may not support the call type requested by the initiating radio.
• The system may be in a failure situation. Depending on the settings and the situation, the sites may
be in local site trunking and only allow certain types of calls, or the Zone Controller may be using
default access permissions.
• The radio may be calling an individual or talkgroup that does not exist or that is not registered with
the system.
• The radio may not be configured to make the requested type of call.
• For talkgroup calls, a console that should be attached to the call may not able to participate in the
call.
• The radio is not operating at one of its valid sites.
• The zone is not able to communicate with the home zone of the initiating radio.
• The zone is not in interzone trunking with the other zones that need to participate in the call. The
particular resources may not be available for the call.

5.11
Interference Detection
Interference Detection gives the System Operator a warning of interference conditions affecting the
uplink carrier frequency of any channels within any system cell. Interference is defined as any RF
signal, condition, or characteristic that may adversely affect one or more radios within any cell of the
system. This might include, for example, a malicious RF “jamming” signal; non-malicious interference
caused by nearby equipment with poor EMC characteristics; or malfunction within a radio’s equipment
that adversely affects other non-malfunctioning radios within the cell.
Interference Detection offers a mechanism that automatically removes all channel resources affected
by the interference from service, for the duration of the interference condition and transfer the service
to other channels that are clear of interference. The procedure is the same for both Control, Voice and
Data channels.
The interference condition is clearly visible on the system fault management consoles, including the
UEM console, as a “Yellow” state.
The values that define the interference detection criteria shall be configurable for each cell of the
system (BTS level), using BTS Service Software (TESS) for initial values and through the NM
subsystem. The new parameters are manager owned. They comprise of three integer parameters:

139
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 5: DIMETRA Call Processing

• Condition Alert Hysteresis. Proportional to the time taken to clear an interference condition,
dependent also on the rate of packets received and the proportion of interference to non-
interference packets.
• Condition Alert Ratio. Proportional to the frequency of received interference packets that trigger an
interference condition, dependent also on the ratio of interference to non-interference packets.
• Received Signal Level Threshold. The minimum received signal strength for corrupt packets to be
classified as interference.

140
 MN005775A01-A
DIMETRA System Features

Chapter 6

DIMETRA System Features

6.1
Voice Services
The following voice services are offered by the system. Unless stated otherwise, both radios and
dispatch consoles can both initiate and receive these services. For details, see Call Types on page
115.
• Talkgroup Call
• Object Call
• Announcement Call
• Emergency Call
• Individual Call (Semi Duplex or Full Duplex)
• Telephone Interconnect Call

6.2
Data Services
This following sections describe the Data Services provided by the system. Unless stated otherwise
both radios and dispatch consoles can both initiate and receive these services. The only
supplementary services (see Supplementary Services on page 143) applicable to all the Data Services
are Air Interface Encryption and Talking Party Identification.

Status Transfer Service

The Status Transfer Service allows a radio to send a precoded status message to the dispatch console
system. The service uses the TETRA Short Data Service over the air interface. Only radios can send a
status message and the service is only supported on the Main Control Channel (MCCH). The status
message is delivered to all dispatch consoles that have the affiliated talkgroup of the radios assigned.
The status message is only sent to dispatch consoles, not to radios that are members of the talkgroup.
The Zone Controller generates an acknowledgment that is returned to the originating radio to indicate
that the status message has been delivered to the dispatch console system.

Emergency Alarm
The Emergency Alarm service allows a radio to send an emergency alarm to both the dispatch system
and the Radio Control Manager (RCM) application.
Only radios can send an Emergency Alarm and the Alarm is delivered to all dispatch consoles that
have the affiliated talkgroup of the radio assigned. The status message is only sent to dispatch
consoles, not to radios that are members of the talkgroup.
The Zone Controller generates an acknowledgment that is returned to the originating radio to indicate
that the Emergency Alarm has been received.
NOTICE: The system can also be configured so the RCM, Console, or CADI acknowledges the
Emergency Alarm.

141
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Short Data Transport Service

The Short Data Transport Service (SDTS) lets applications access the Point-to-Point or broadcast
Short Data Service (SDS) transfer over the air. It supports messages of up to 140 characters per
message.
The SDS uses TETRA Short Subscriber Identity (SSI) addressing and data can be transferred
between:
• Radio to radio.
• Radio to fixed IP host (the IP host must have an assigned SSI and be registered with the Short Data
Router).
• Fixed IP host to radio group or broadcast (the destination devices must have assigned SSIs and be
registered with the Short Data Router).
• Fixed IP host to Fixed IP host.
SDS supports concurrent voice and data operation. Access to the SDTS is through the Peripheral
Equipment Interface at the radios and using an IP connection to the Short Data Router (SDR) in the
DIMETRA infrastructure. In addition, there is an internal interface within Motorola Solutions radios to
the SDTS, used for the Alphanumeric Text Service (ATS).

Enhanced SDR Capacity with Utilization Notification

This feature is used to monitor the message rate for each SDR in the system, to set a capacity
utilization threshold alarm, and to collect short data messages statistics. The SDR sends an alarm to
UEM when the threshold (configured in ZCM per SDR) is exceeded. This information allows
investigating the current usage and trends of usage of short data messages.
For information on how to configure this feature, see the Zone Configuration Manager manual. The
feature requires a license.

Alphanumeric Text Service

The Alphanumeric Text Service (ATS) enables free text messages to be sent between radios, dispatch
consoles and computers in the fixed network. It is analogous to the Short Message Service (SMS)
familiar to GSM users.
Often, the ATS application is run on a computer that also runs the Elite Dispatch application (a
dispatch console), but it can be run on a stand-alone computer that may be external to the DIMETRA
system. The ATS application has the following features:
• A message list which allows free text of up to 500 characters in Unicode or 1000 characters in
ASCII to be entered and stored.
• An address book which allows the radio name, department, and Individual Short Subscriber Identity
(ISSI) of the radio to be entered and stored.
• Messages are sent by selecting one or more entries from the address book and either entering the
text message to be sent or selecting a message from the message list.
• Sent messages are displayed in the sent list which indicates the time and date the message was
sent, whom the message was sent to and the status of the message.
• The user can request notification that a message has been read.
• Message broadcast to a stored address list, or to a stored list of sites.
• When a message is received this is announced via audible and visual indication. The user is given
the option to read the message immediately, or read the message later.
• The radio application shall store up to 8 messages. If a new message arrives while the radio queue
is full, the radio rejects the incoming message and the sender receives indication that delivery
failed.

142
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Packet Data Service

The Packet Data Service (PDS) is a bearer service that allows IP hosts to communicate using the
Internet Protocol (IP). It is used to transport various types of data files in the system.
Access to the PDS is through the Peripheral Equipment Interface at the radios and using an IP
connection to the GGSN in the infrastructure.

Data Resilience
Data resilience is the feature that takes the first steps to eliminate all ’Single Point of Failure’ points for
data features: short data and packet data.
The feature includes:
• Warm standby SDR and PDG
• Warm standby GGSN
• Resilient Mobility Push
• Remote failure recovery

Tetra Enhanced Data Services (TEDS)

The TETRA Enhanced Data Services (TEDS) feature on a DIMETRA IP system, requires a separate
NM license. TEDS is an extension of the current packet data solution in the DIMETRA system. It offers
higher data transmission speed, and its most important features are:
• Use of the 4-QAM, 16-QAM, and 64-QAM modulations (in addition to the π/4-DQPSK modulation)
and ability to choose the most appropriate modulation for the current signal propagation
environment.
• Use 50 kHz carrier frequency bandwidth (in addition to the 25 kHz carrier frequency bandwidth).
• TEDS is only an extension of the current packet data solution in DIMETRA IP System and will
therefore support all the features of the current packet data solution (for example Multi-slot packet
data, sending short-data messages on PDCH/TEDS channels).

6.3
Supplementary Services
The following provides details for different supplementary services that are supported by the DIMETRA
system.
NOTICE: Supplementary Services are optional and subject to license fees.

Busy Queuing and Call Back

Busy Queuing and Call Back is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the Group Call, Individual
Call and Telephone Interconnect services (voice services).
The system supports queuing of voice calls whenever a traffic channel is required and no traffic
channels are available. If there is no traffic channel available at one or more of the sites required for
the call, the call is placed in a queue. When the required traffic channels for the call become available,
the calling party is automatically called back to indicate that the call has now been set up and has initial
transmit permission.

Queuing Priority
Queuing Priority is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the Group Call, Individual Call, and
Telephone Interconnect services.

143
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

The system provides 10 levels of priority where level 1 is the highest and reserved for emergency
group calls. The NM assigns levels 2-10 to individuals and talkgroups. The priority assigned to a group
call is the individual priority of the calling party or the group priority, whichever is higher. The priority
level is used in the case where a system is busy and calls are queued. When the systems get busy,
calls with higher priority are allocated traffic channels before calls with lower priority.

Call Out
A Call Out alert is sent in the form of an individually addressed SDS text message to a radio or
individually addressed SDS text messages to multiple radios. The SDS text message can be
configured to contain a Talkgroup change for all target radios so that the users responding to the call
out can communicate with each other.
Example usage: In the event of a major fire, the dispatcher can alert police and fire officers in the field
of the incident by an audio alarm or a text message with the aim to ask them to go to the scene of the
incident. The users can then respond back to the dispatcher 'Coming' or 'Not coming'. The dispatcher
knows which officers are present at the scene of the incident.

Recent User Priority

Recent User Priority is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the group call service. If, during a
group call, a user is slow to make a response and the traffic channel is deallocated, the call enters a
recent user queue. If a user then responds within 10 seconds the call is given priority for a traffic
channel over new calls (of the same priority) also waiting for a traffic channel allocation. Recent User
Priority lets a talkgroup call have more conversational continuity when there is a busy queue.

Dynamic Site Assignment

Dynamic Site Assignment is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the group call service.
Dynamic site assignment means that traffic channels are only assigned at sites where there are
currently one or more members of the talkgroup registered. To accomplish this the system maintains a
database that identifies, for each talkgroup, which sites should be included in a call at any given time.

All Start/Fast Start

All Start/Fast Start is a DIMETRA service that supplements the group call service. For each talkgroup,
the Network Manager (NM) can set the talkgroup to operate in either AllStart or Fast Start modes. In
AllStart mode, if the system is busy and not all resources are available to set up a group call, the
system waits for all required resources to become available before setting up a call. This ensures that
all the sites having members of the talkgroup are included when the call begins. In Fast Start mode,
the call is set up with whatever sites are available, while additional sites are added to the call as and
when resources become available. This ensures that calls are set up as quickly as possible even when
the system is busy.

Critical Site Assignment

Critical Site Assignment is a DIMETRA service that supplements the group call service. For each
talkgroup, the Network Manager (NM) can create a list of Critical Sites. These are sites that must be
included in a group call for it to be set up. Thus, even when Fast Start is in operation, the call is not set
up until channels are available at all the critical sites for the talkgroup.
Furthermore, a group-call is always set up at a critical site, whether any members of the talkgroup are
registered at the site.

Talking Party Identification

Talking Party Identification is a DIMETRA service that supplements group call, individual call, and data
services. Whenever a radio or dispatch console is transmitting, the ID of this talking party is always
forwarded to the other (receiving) radios and dispatch consoles. If the talking party changes through

144
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

normal conversation or through interruption, then the ID of the new talking party is again forwarded to
the other radios or dispatch consoles in the call.

Calling Line Identification Presentation

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the
Telephone Interconnect Call service. It provides a (called) radio with the identity of a calling PABX or
PSTN user if the calling party identity is present in the call set up from the external exchange.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Overdial

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Overdial is a DIMETRA service that supplements the Telephone
Interconnect Call service. This service allows a radio user send digital information as DTMF tones
during the conversation phase of a call. This can be used for accessing services via the PABX or
PSTN. All defined DTMF tones (0-9,A,B,C.D,*,#) are supported by the system.

Late Entry
Late Entry is a DIMETRA service that always supplements the group call and announcement call
service. While a call is in progress on a traffic channel, late entry signaling is sent on the main control
channel. This lets radios that failed to decode the initial call set up signaling (for whatever reason) to
join a call in progress. The interval between late entry messages depends on system loading. Late
entry signaling is identical to the initial call set up signaling and therefore a radio cannot distinguish
between the two.

Priority Monitor
Priority Monitor is a DIMETRA service that supplements the group call service. The Network Manager
(NM) can mark selected talkgroups or multigroups as priority groups. At sites where calls for these
groups are being set up, the call set up messages are sent on all the traffic channels at the site where
group calls are ongoing (in addition to the Main Control Channel (MCCH)). This gives those radios that
can monitor more than one talkgroup the opportunity to exit the current call and jump to the priority
group.
In addition, any emergency call signaling is also sent on all the traffic channels at the sites where the
emergency call is being set up.

Preemptive Priority Call

This feature allows group calls and individual calls for Preemptive Priority Call (PPC) enabled radios,
talkgroups and multigroups to be granted traffic resources by ruthless preemption should there be no
free traffic channel at the requesting or destination sites when the call is set up.
The network manager controls PPC, and the user cannot raise the priority of a call to PPC through the
radio user interface.
When traffic resources are available, PPC calls are set up as normal calls, however, if traffic channels
are not available the Zone Controller preempts the necessary resources from normal calls of lower
priority level. The ZC uses the preempted resources to continue the set-up procedure of the PPC call.

Preemptive Priority Call – Busy User Preemption

Any individual radio or dispatcher can be enabled in the infrastructure for the Preemptive Priority call
(PPC) supplementary service. Should a PPC enabled user initiate an individual call to a radio that is
engaged in another, lower priority individual or telephone interconnect call, or involved in packet data
transfer, then the new PPC call takes precedence and interrupt the existing call.

145
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Site Wide Call

The Site Wide Call (SWC) service is an enhancement to the standard group-call service and allows a
console to communicate with all radios located at one or more sites. Generally, Site Wide calls also
employ Preemptive Priority call (PPC), and in practice are often raised as emergency calls.

Barring of Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Barring of Incoming Calls/Barring of Outgoing Calls (BIC/BOC) is a feature, which allows to control the
communication of radio users to talkgroups. It allows to configure the permissions of radio users to
initiate calls and to receive calls from certain talkgroups. The controlling mechanism covers private and
talkgroup calls and applies to all radio and console users.
This feature appears in two contexts:
• BIC/BOC is often used with other features, like Object Call. This involves the creation of a Barring
Profile in the User Configuration Manager.
• BIC/BOC is also used as a DIMETRA supplementary service of the Telephone Interconnect Call
service. Each radio user can be barred by the Network Manager from making incoming outgoing
telephone interconnect calls with certain specified numbers or number ranges. The numbers and
ranges are specified in Exclusion Classes in the User Configuration Manager.
For more information, see the Barring of Incoming/Outgoing Calls and the Call Processing and Mobility
Management manuals.

Telephony – BIC/BOC
Barring of Telephone Interconnect Calls is a DIMETRA supplementary service of the Telephone
Interconnect Call service. Each radio or console user can be barred by the Network Manager from
receiving incoming or initiating outgoing telephone interconnect calls with certain specified numbers or
number ranges. The numbers and ranges are specified in Exclusion Classes. For more information,
see the Call Processing and Mobility Management manual.

Requested Sites
Requested Sites is a DIMETRA supplementary service that supplements the Group Call Service: The
Network Manager can specify a list of requested sites for each talkgroup. When a group call is set up,
the call is set up at each requested site even if there are no members of the talkgroup registered at
these sites. In this way, requested sites are always in group calls for a talkgroup. This can be used to
ensure that scanning radios (which are not affiliated) are able to receive talkgroup calls even if there
are no affiliated talkgroup members at a site.

RUA/RUI
The Radio User Assignment/Radio User Identity (RUA/RUI) feature makes the system able to assign
alphanumeric user names to radio users, and to authenticate the radio users in a logon process. The
RUA/RUI feature makes it possible for a dispatcher or a radio to recognize a radio user by a unique
identity that is independent of the ID of the radio.
When RUA/RUI is applied in the system, you can define different profiles for a specific radio user
identity (RUI). Some profiles are defined in the infrastructure, and some are defined in the radio. The
profiles determine which capabilities are available to the radio user. The capabilities available at a
specific time depend on whether the radio user is logged on or not, and whether the radio requires log
on or not.

Control Channel Immunity

The Control Channel Immunity feature maintains high availability of site resources during periods of
interference and provides security for broadcast control channel information. Control Channel Immunity

146
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

includes a number of different functions to protect the system and maintain operations, including the
following functions:
• Detect interference on uplink or downlink control channel carrier frequency.
• Report interference activities to Unified Event Manager.
• Scramble broadcast information pertaining to the main control channel carrier.
• Revert to another available control channel at the site during periods of interference.
When interference is detected on an uplink control channel carrier, a trap is sent to Unified Event
Manager. If the interference signal exceeds the configured threshold, the Site Controller reverts to an
alternate channel at the site which has control channel capability. The primary control channel is
removed from service for the duration of the interference. The alternate channel then provides
downlink control signaling and accepts uplink signaling from the radios. The Site Controller may
terminate other services on a particular channel when the channel is required for control channel
purposes.
When a radio detects a failure or interference condition on the control channel downlink, the radio
attempts to revert to one of the alternate control channels at the site.
The site can be configured to just detect interference and send a trap to Unified Event Manager, or the
site can be configured to automatically remove the carrier from service and revert to another available
carrier (as described above). This operation is similar to the control channel fall back operation which is
used during a control channel failure.

Control Room Head Number

The Control Room Head Number (CRHN) feature is designed to operate either with Motorola
Solutions’ MCC 7500 consoles or using an ICCS.
When applied to an ICCS system CRHN feature defines the Head Number as a group of Console
Nodes (resources) in the ICCS gateway and it allows an agency located in an ICCS control room to be
uniquely identified in terms of call address, regardless of the Dispatch Consoles assigned to this
agency. From a logical point of view, this unique identity materializes in a Head Number (ISSI)
assigned to the agency in that ICCS control room. Therefore there are not individual numbers/ID’s per
dispatcher and it is up to the ICCS control room system to decide which Dispatch Console deals with
which call, instead of the individual user calling an individual Dispatch Console.
When the CRHN feature is used directly with Motorola’s MCC 7500 Dispatch Consoles the Head
Number groups a number of consoles in a control room under one unique address and the
infrastructure allocates the call to a particular Dispatch Console.
The Head Number (ISSI) is employed by the radio or console users to place individual calls towards
an agency in a control room and it is also the number displayed in the radio or console when the user
receives an individual or a group call from an agency’s console in a specific control room. The
Control Room Head Number feature is configurable in the PRNM, and care must be taken in the
configuration for the ICCS setup (Console Nodes) or the MCC 7500 consoles setup to reflect the
operation described above.
The Control Room Head Number feature is license controlled and can be enabled or disabled from the
NMT.

Energy Economy Mode

The Energy Economy Mode is a feature on a DIMETRA system and requires a separate NM license.
This feature enables the use of the Energy Economy Mode on a particular MTS/EBTS station (by
radios that support this feature). When available for radios, this mode allows for battery saving
operation.

147
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

SDR Audit Logging

Audit logging is a DIMETRA feature where configuration changes are logged so they can be examined
at a later time.
In Network Management the following actions are logged:
• UCS configuration changes made using UCM.
• UCS configuration changes made using UCS API.
• ZDS configuration changes made using ZCM.
• Diagnostic commands performed using ZCM.
For the SDR the following changes are logged:
• Zone to SDR ID map
• Broadcast region
• Host
The log contains the time of the activity, the identity of who performed the activity, and which activity
was performed. The format of the log file is XML.

Control Channel Utilization Notification

This feature allows to monitor the Control Channel utilization. A utilization threshold can be configured
in ZCM for each MTS and an UEM alarm is generated when that threshold is exceeded. For
information how to configure this feature, see the Zone Configuration Manager manual.

6.4
Call Logging features
The following sections explain the call logging features available in the DIMETRA system.

Central Voice Logging

Motorola Solutions' logging system allows an agency to record audio transmissions as well as certain
radio events from selected talkgroups/channels and individuals in a radio system. These recordings
are archived for future playback and use by authorized users/administrators.
Motorola Solutions' voice logging solution consists of three components. For details, see Logging
System on page 88.

Discreet Listening
The DIMETRA system offers a Discreet Listening feature that enables a user to monitor one to one
calls of selected radios in real time. The Discreet Listening feature comes with a stand-alone PC that
can be placed in a secluded room and offers real-time audio from the selected radio without giving the
radio user any indication that the call is being monitored. Monitoring can be performed on one to one
calls within the DIMETRA network and calls using Telephone Interconnect.
The Discreet Listening feature offers the following functions:
• Monitoring of two radios simultaneously for the purpose of listening to audio.
• Real-time audio of one to one calls (radio to radio/radio to telephone/telephone to radio) on
monitored radios.
• Possibility of connecting a third-party recorder.
• Log file records of radio activity on monitored radios.
• Log file records of Discreet Listening user activities.

148
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

NOTICE: For further information on the Discreet Listening feature, see the MCC 7500 Discreet
Listening Feature manual.

6.5
Mobility Features
The following sections explain the mobility features in the DIMETRA system.

Agency Priority Matrix

The purpose of the Agency Priority Matrix is to ensure that even in busy scenarios, the most critical
radio users and talkgroups have sufficient RF channel resources. The Agency Priority Matrix controls
which talkgroups or radio units are permitted to be assigned an RF channel resource per site in the
system. This feature does not prevent emergency calls (group or Ambience Listening calls) from being
set-up even though the called User Groups percent of site resources has been reached.
The matrix is a list of partitions known as User Groups that works system wide. A maximum of 100
User Groups is allowed in the system. The matrix contains information on the percent of RF channel
resources a User Group is guaranteed to have available in the system on each site where it is
configured. Once the User Group list has been defined, the administrator associates each radio user
and each talkgroup to a User Group, both of which are also present on the User Configuration
Manager.

Extended Range
Range Extension for Air to Ground Stations is an enhancement of a base station so the existing 58 km
cell limit is extended to 83 km.

Subscriber Class
The Subscriber Class functionality is used to allow radios belonging to certain classes to use certain
cells and likewise used to restrict radios belonging to certain classes from using certain cells.
The Subscriber Class is a service criteria in cell selection, allowing/restricting radios for being used on
certain cells.
Subscriber Class is one of the features supporting Mobility. The other mobility features are Valid Sites
and Cell Reselection Parameters.

Valid Sites
Valid Sites is a Motorola Solutions service that supplements the individual and group call service. For
each radio and talkgroup, the Network Manager (NM) can define a list of valid sites for the talkgroup.
Users cannot use the site unless the site is listed as valid for that radio or talkgroup. If a radio roams to
an invalid site , it is allowed to register, but cannot initiate or receive any calls. This is only signaled to
the user when attempting to initiate a call. The valid sites for a radio or talkgroup can range from a
single site to every site in the system.
This feature lets the NM control the geographic extent of the radio or talkgroup. In addition, the NM
can, for each site and each radio or talkgroup, enable or disable emergency calls at non-valid sites.
This lets users make emergency calls to a talkgroup even if they are located at a non-valid site for the
radio or talkgroup.

Common Secondary Control Channel

Common Secondary Control Channel is a TETRA standard feature extending the signaling capacity of
the Main Control Channel by using one or more additional channels for the messages otherwise only
sent on the MCCH. Adding a C-SCCH, removes a channel from the normal voice and data service, so
if a C-SCCH is added without knowing the load situation on the site it may actually reduce the overall

149
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

service provided to the end user. Accordingly, an integral part of the C-SCCH feature, is a set of
features that help the network operator determine the right moment to increase or decrease the
number of Common SCCHs. C-SCCH is only supported on the MTS.

eTETRA
eTETRA is a feature allowing to extend the capacity of the system operating in the standard 380-400
MHz band (NT) with the channels in the 410-430 MHz band (eT). The system assigns channels to eT-
capable radios with preference to eT. It is transparent to users whether they have an NT radio or an eT
radio.

6.6
Console Operator Features
The following sections explain the console operator features available in the DIMETRA system.

Assignable Talkgroups
In order for a dispatch console to communicate with a talkgroup, the talkgroup must first be defined as
a resource within the console system. This is done using the User Configuration Manager (UCM).
Once a talkgroup resource is defined using UCM it can be assigned to individual dispatch consoles.
Talkgroups can be assigned to dispatch consoles permanently (so that they are always available to the
dispatch console) using Elite Admin or they can be assigned temporarily by the dispatch console, in
which case they are only assigned until the Elite Dispatch application is next closed.
Talkgroups are represented on the dispatch console as talkgroup windows. Talkgroup windows can be
displayed in expanded or compressed format and can be grouped in folders.

Assignable Speakers and Audio Summing

The dispatch consoles are equipped with two speakers, Speaker I and Speaker II. These are
assignable to monitor any specific resource but are normally assigned as:
• Speaker I monitors the audio of the currently selected talkgroup.
• Speaker II monitors the audio from all the (remaining) unselected talkgroups.
This lets the dispatch console user monitor the voice activity on all the assigned talkgroups. The
volume of Speaker I and Speaker II can be set independently.

Repeat Disable
The Repeat Disable feature allows a dispatch console to disable the talkgroup inbound audio from
being repeated to the rest of the talkgroup. The feature allows DIMETRA to emulate conventional Base
Station operation. Once enabled, Repeat Disable is then effective for all group calls in that talkgroup
until canceled.

Temporary Disable
DIMETRA allows a network management operator to temporarily disable or re-enable a radio over the
air. The radio is unable to make or receive calls while it is disabled, even if the radio is turned off and
turned back on. If the radio is turned on, it is still registered in the system and is able to roam.

Permanent Disable
As well as Temporary Disable, Permanent Disable is also intended to protect a network from attack
from a compromised or faulty radio. It shall be used when the radio is known to have been
compromised, or has been suspected of compromise for a long time.

150
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Permanent disable of radio subscription, signaled by ITSI, allows disabling of subscription either of an
integrated radio, or of SIM where a SIM is used. Unlike the temporary disable feature, mutual
authentication is a precondition for permanent disable.
Permanent Disable is a one-way function, there is no equivalent enable function. The radio requires
recovery and reprogramming before it can be used again.

Trunking System Status

This feature provides a mechanism for dispatch consoles to determine the current zone status. The
feature is similar to the Zone Status feature on the Radio Control Manager.

Console Priority
Once a group call is in progress, dispatch consoles have the highest priority when the system sets the
source of audio for the call. This lets a dispatch console interrupt a currently transmitting radio in a
group call. There are different levels of priority within the dispatch console system. The table below
shows the priority for the audio source in a group call.

Table 12: Console Priority Levels

Priority Level Audio Source

1 Primary Supervisory Console Instant Transmit
2 Secondary Supervisory Console Instant Transmit
3 Operator Console Instant Transmit
4 Any Console General Transmit
5 Radio Transmit

Status Message Display

A status message that is sent from a radio appears in the stack of a talkgroup resource window of the
Elite Dispatch application. The stack displays up to 24 entries. The talkgroup window in which the
status message is displayed is the talkgroup to which the radio is currently affiliated.

All Mute
The All Mute feature lets a dispatch console operator quickly mute all audio except the currently
selected resource for a predetermined length of time. The time can range from 0 to 255 seconds.

Instant Transmit
The Instant Transmit feature lets a dispatch console transmit to an unselected talkgroup with a single
action without having to select the talkgroup first. It also gives the transmission a higher priority than
using general transmit.
Note that using instant transmit on an unselected talkgroup resource does not select that resource so
any received audio is routed to the unselected speaker.

Safety Switch
The Safety Switch protects the dispatch console instant-transmit button from accidental use. The
dispatch console system manager can protect the instant transmit button for each resource as
required. To use a protected instant transmit button, the dispatch console operator must first select the
safety switch, then press the instant transmit button within five seconds.

151
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Intelligent Call Indicator

The Intelligent Call Indicator feature lets a dispatch console operator know whether any other dispatch
console in the zone has a talkgroup selected. When a group call is in progress for an unselected
talkgroup, the (incoming) call indicator in the talkgroup window flashes if no other dispatch console has
that talkgroup selected. If another dispatch console selects the talkgroup, the call indicator stops
flashing. The call indicator always flashes on the selected talkgroup.

Supervisory Console User

Multiple users in the zone may be configured with Supervisory Console User. This means that the
console user has higher transmit priority.
Optionally, one or more dispatch consoles in the zone can be designated secondary supervisory
dispatch consoles. These dispatch consoles have audio priority over other dispatch console
transmissions in a group when using the instant transmit feature.

Console Multi-Select
This feature enables a dispatch console to transmit simultaneously to more than one talkgroup. A
dispatch console that has been assigned a Multi-select resource can assign talkgroups to a Multi-
Select resource.
When the dispatch console initiates a call to the talkgroups in the Multi-Select resource, a call is
established to each talkgroup and the console audio is routed to each talkgroup.
When the dispatch console releases the PTT, the call to each talkgroup is terminated. (This is in
contrast to Console Patch, where the talkgroups remain patched until the dispatch console explicitly
terminates the patch).

All Points Bulletin Transmission

An All-Points Bulletin is a method of transmitting to a multi-select group quickly and without first making
the multi-select the selected resource. It can be viewed as an instant transmit, but for a multi-select
group instead of a single resource.

Console Patch
The Console Patch feature enables a dispatch console to patch together two or more talkgroups. A
dispatch console that has been assigned a Patch resource can assign talkgroups to a Patch resource.
The patch remains in effect until the dispatch console explicitly terminates it. Each time a user (radio or
dispatch console) transmits to the patched talkgroups, a call is established to each talkgroup and the
audio is routed to all the patched talkgroups.
A Private call may be added to a Console Patch by first setting up the Private call, and then adding it to
the patch configuration.

Conventional Channel Patch

The Conventional Channel Patch feature lets a console user patch talkgroups to conventional channels
that are connected to the system. Voice detection is used on patched conventional channels to initiate
group calls.

Console Acoustic Cross-Mute

This feature allows the acoustic muting of outbound transmissions from other dispatch consoles in the
zone. This is typically used when dispatch consoles are located near to each other in the same
dispatch center to eliminate the possibility of acoustic feedback between the dispatch consoles. Cross-
muting is configured via the User Configuration Manager.

152
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Ambience Listening
This feature allows a radio to be remotely set to transmit, without giving any external indication that a
call is being set up or is in progress. Ambience Listening is implemented as a simplex individual call, so
the radio does not receive any audio during the call and if the monitored radio is turned off during the
ambience listening call, it continues to transmit, although it appears to have been turned off to the user.
Ambience listening is always initiated by the infrastructure, either from a dispatch console or via a third-
party application interfacing through the console feature API.

Alert Tones on DCS

This feature, available on the Dispatch Communication Server (DCS) allows the dispatcher to send a
tone directly from a dispatch console to a radio to attract one’s attention.

Control Room Individual Call Features

NOTICE: You can configure Control Room Individual Call Features only if you purchase
dedicated feature licenses. The Call Take, Call Hold, and Call Transfer features are offered
under the Control Room Features license.
Call Take
Call Take allows informing the consoles associated with the CRHN about changes of queue, such
as new calls, disconnected calls, calls on hold, and timed-out calls. It includes capabilities to
retrieve the initial call, retrieve a call from hold, and end a call in the queue.
Call Hold
Call Hold allows a console user (operator) to a put an active individual call on hold, irrespective of
who initiated the call, to call a third party, take an incoming call, or transfer the call.
Call Transfer
Call Transfer allows a console user (operator) to connect two users (User A and User B) into one
active individual call. User A, is on Hold, public or private, while User B participates in the active
individual call with the console operator initiating the Call Transfer. After the Call Transfer, the
console operator is disconnected from the call, while User A and User B are connected together in
the active individual call.
Console Telephone Interconnect
Console Telephone Interconnect offers telephone interconnect capabilities to CRHN objects and
Console Users, including:
• Console-to-landline calls
• Landline-to-console calls
• CRHN-to-landline calls
• Landline-to-CRHN calls
International calls are supported for console-to-landline and landline-to-console calls.
Selectable Half Duplex Individual Call
This feature allows a dispatcher to select whether an individual call to a radio is made in half-duplex
or full-duplex mode, irrespective of the Radio User's settings in UCM.

6.7
Console Management Features
Two applications are provided to manage the dispatch console system: User Configuration Manager
(UCM) and the Elite Admin application.
UCM defines the attributes of the dispatch console system, whereas Elite Admin defines how
information is presented on each dispatch console display.

153
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

User Configuration Manager

User Configuration Manager (UCM) is an application used to enter and maintain radio-related
configuration information for User Configuration Server (UCS).
UCM configures information for initial configuration of the system and then is used as needed to
update the information. To configure a DIMETRA system, you need to enter information into both UCM
in each cluster, and Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) in each zone. When you initially configure or
make changes in UCM, the configuration information updates UCS and is replicated to the Zone
Database Server (ZDS) in each zone in the cluster.

Elite Admin Application

The Elite Admin application defines how information is presented on each dispatch console. It provides
for the configuration of the following items:
• The default resource (talkgroup) windows and folders.
• The features available within each window.
• The items appearing in the menus.
• The buttons in the toolbar.
You can use Windows file permissions to control who can modify the files.
If enabled, dispatch console operators can make limited changes to the configuration of their dispatch
console (such as adding resources). These changes are temporary and are lost when the user logs
out. Permanent changes to configurations can only be made using Elite Admin.

6.8
Enhanced Software Update
Enhanced Software Update is a feature allowing for a centralized upgrade, backup, and restore of the
server applications.

Upgrade Install Server

The Upgrade Install Server (UIS) is part of the enhanced upgrade framework, hosted on the Core
Server. Primary UIS application is installed as a container on the Primary Core Server, while
secondary UIS application is installed as a separate container on the Secondary Core Server.
Each zone deploys its own UIS. UIS is responsible for upgrade application servers within the same
zone where it is located. UIS to UIS interface will use file transfer and remote command execution
protocols to synchronize data between all UIS servers deployed in the system.

Upgrade Console
Upgrade Console is a web application used for controlling, executing, and monitoring the upgrade
process accessed from the NM Client PC. It is used for creating data backups, restoring data, and
upgrading software. Furthermore, the application is used for performing administrative tasks on the
Enhanced Software Update tool.

Backup and Restore Functionality

The Backup and Restore Functionality allows you to back up system applications on demand,
schedule regular backups, download and upload backup files, and restore system applications from
backup files.
To use this feature, you must be logged on to the Upgrade Console with the backup role.

154
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 6: DIMETRA System Features

Log Collector
Log Collector is a DIMETRA feature which allows to gather system logs for examination. It allows to
limit the scope and size of log downloads by selecting specific zones, application servers and
workstations within one cluster for which the logs need to be collected. To use this feature, the user
must be logged in to the upgrade console with the Log Collector Role.

155
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Chapter 7

DIMETRA Network Management

The following sections provide an introduction to Network Management (NM) and the FCAPS model.

7.1
System Management Objectives and Framework
As a telecommunications network, the DIMETRA system needs to be managed as any other
telecommunications network is managed. The Network Management (NM) subsystem can be viewed
as a set of software applications or tools used to manage the system and its components. These tools
are intended to maximize the available resources and minimize system downtime.
Five key functional areas or services are associated with a network management framework:
Fault Management
Configuration Management
Accounting Management
Performance Management
Security Management
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) refers to this as the FCAPS model. The NM
subsystem offers effective and efficient solutions that address each of the FCAPS requirements.
The NM subsystem supports the following services:
Fault Management
Applications are included for monitoring the status of the transport network and the individual
infrastructure components, displaying fault information, forwarding alert information, and performing
diagnostic procedures.
Configuration Management
Facilities are provided for entering and maintaining the operational parameters of the infrastructure
components and user devices (such as radios).
Accounting Management
NM supports the tracking of radio usage of the system by providing an interface to third-party
accounting and/or billing applications.
Performance Management
Applications are available for monitoring, reporting, controlling, and optimizing the use of system
resources.
Security Management
NM includes features for setting user privileges and controlling their access to view and/or modify
information contained in the configuration databases.
Systems continue to grow in size and technical complexity. Work demands are increasing on system
administrators who are routinely faced with handling multiple tasks. Remote access leverages system
administrators' time. At the same time, the mobile work force increasingly relies on radio
communication services to fulfill their critical missions. Even a brief service interruption or degraded
quality of service could impact organizational effectiveness, productivity, or safety. Rapid fault
detection, notification, and repair require sophisticated tools that are technologically equal to the
managed network. Features and benefits are detailed in the following.

156
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

7.2
Serviceability
Serviceability for a DIMETRA system, at the MSO, is the capability to provide maintenance of the
equipment either locally from a service terminal or remotely through modems or remote LAN
connections. To facilitate service to the remote sites DIMETRA BTS (Base Transceiver Station)
Service Software (TESS) is available as a remote terminal (only from within the RNI) so many
maintenance functions regarding the BTS sites can be done remotely.
This clause describes the architecture by which the service organizations and other support functions
can get access to elements in a DIMETRA system. The maintenance procedures and functions such
as fault and performance management are described in more detail in Private Radio Network
Management Suite Applications on page 174.

Local Serviceability of the MSO

Local serviceability means the ability to service the system from a local service computer, which is
collocated at the MSO.
For a Geographical Redundant Zone, every Geographical Redundant Zone MSO (Location) contains a
terminal server. These are the following connection options:
• Connect directly to the affected device and log on.
• Connect to the affected device using the terminal server and log on.
• Connect to the IP port on the affected device using the LAN switch.
• Connect to the IP port on the affected device using the terminal server.
Certain devices support an IP-based out-of-band management functionality. This functionality allows
service of the device even though its standard Ethernet port has failed or even when its operating
system has crashed. A dedicated Ethernet port provides this feature together with the device’s in-build
hardware and software support. The IP-based out-of-band features are:
• For HP servers: Integrated Lights-Out (iLO). The HP servers are capable of supporting iLO.
• For Sun servers: Integrated Lights-Out Manager (ILOM) is supported using a dedicated NET MGT
and Serial MGT port.
The ILOM feature on Sun servers and the iLO feature on HP ProLiant servers are together considered
as a package for Lights Out Management of DIMETRA devices, called ILOM/iLO feature. For new
systems ILOM/iLO is mandatory, while for legacy systems it is optional.

Remote Serviceability of the MSO

Remote serviceability allows a technician to perform maintenance tasks from a remote service
computer.
For a remote service computer, the following access methods are available:
• Certified solution: connect to the terminal server using a modem connection, either dial-up or direct
connected on leased lines.
• Project-specific solution: connect to a border router and thus the IP network either using WAN links
or using a modem. The modem can again be directly connected using a leased line or a dial-up
modem.
The remote access computer is able to monitor the system and gain access to infrastructure products.
When connecting, the remote access computer can gain access to the MSO by:
• Console and/or ILOM interface to the MSO devices connected to the terminal server using the
terminal server’s menu system.
• PPP IP connectivity to the MSO devices using the terminal server’s LAN connectivity.

157
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

The remote serviceability access means that a technician is allowed access to the elements of the
infrastructure for the following aspects:
• Configuration
• Diagnostics
• Event Log Reporting

7.3
Network Management System
The DIMETRA system features the Motorola Network Management (NM) System based on the client/
server networking model.
In the equipment room, the application and database servers run unattended on industrial-class
computers based on the HP ProLiant DL360 server platform. The server applications run on the Red
Hat Enterprise Linux operating system.

7.3.1
Client/Server Networking
Application processing, data collection and storage are distributed across multiple computer servers
and client PCs connected to a Local Area Network (LAN). The client PCs are commercial personal
computers running the Microsoft Windows operating system for networked computers. Authorized
system managers or network administrator personnel use the client PCs to start and run the software
applications for configuring, viewing equipment operational status, and monitoring network utilization
and performance.
The servers are industrial grade, high performance computers geared to handle the intense, typically
real-time, data processing tasks associated with managing a single zone or handling specific cluster-
level tasks, in multizone systems.

7.3.1.1
Windows-Based Clients
The NM architecture distributes most of the user application processing to the client PCs. This
approach yields important benefits:
• Application performance is less dependent on the number of concurrent users and open
applications.
• Personnel typically responsible for managing a radio system or computer network are already
familiar with, or easily trained to use, the GUI of PRNM applications that conform to Windows
operating system conventions.
• Remote operation performance over a limited bandwidth link (for example, a telephone line used for
accessing the network remotely through dial-up modems) is improved.

7.3.1.2
NM Client Applications
The following NM applications run on or may be accessed from the NM client workstations:

Cluster-Level Applications
User Configuration Manager (UCM)
A management application used to enter and maintain configuration information for User
Configuration Server (UCS). User Configuration Manager (UCM) configures the System, Radios,
Security, and System Health Application Suite Configuration objects.

158
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

System Historical Reports

A management application for multizone systems. Radio traffic statistics from multizones, including
interzone traffic, are accumulated in the System Statistics Server (SSS) and collated to produce
cluster wide reports.

Zone-Level Applications
Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM)
A management application used to enter and maintain configuration information for Zone Database
Server (ZDS). ZCM configures the infrastructure equipment for the system. ZCM is part of the
Motorola Private Radio Network Management Suite.
Zone Historical Reports
A management application producing reports on radio infrastructure and radio resource usage
within an identified zone.
System Health Application Suite
An application used to monitor radio call traffic for individual zones and sites in real time.
Unified Event Manager
The DIMETRA fault management application. Unified Event Manager identifies problems rapidly
and provides functions and tools for notifying support personnel, tracking, diagnosing, and
correcting faults. It also maintains a data warehouse, storing up to 30 days of event history.
Radio Control Manager (RCM)
A management application used to issue commands to radios and monitor events from radios. The
Radio Control Manager (RCM) is part of the Motorola PRNM Suite.
These applications input to or extract information from one or more of the NM servers where system
configuration parameters are stored, transactional statistics are accumulated, real-time data streams
are sourced, and supporting processes are performed. In addition to these “user applications,” the NM
servers also run several autonomous processes in the background to support the ongoing operation of
the system. Applications and processes are described later.

7.3.1.3
Network Management System Servers
Motorola Solutions has integrated the NM application and database servers on the Gen9 platform.
The NM subsystem is composed of the following servers at the zone and cluster levels of the system:

NM Zone-Level Servers (One Per Zone)

• Air Traffic Router
• Zone Database Server
• Unified Event Manager Server
• Zone Statistics Server

Cluster-Level Servers (One Per Cluster)

• User Configuration Server
• System Statistics Server (used on multizone clusters only)

7.3.1.4
Zone-Level Servers
The following sections describe zone-level servers.

159
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Air Traffic Router

The Air Traffic Router (ATR) hosts a variety of real-time, data processing applications to support user
and system applications. Its functions include:
• Processing real-time call transactions, being the information source for System Health Application
Suite and RCM.
• Serving as source of the Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA) data stream to third-party
applications.
• Logging to disk ATIA data for viewing or export to a text file.
• Routing RCM command and status/messages to/from the Zone Controller.
• Routing call logging information from the Zone Controller to the Zone Statistics Server (ZSS) and
System Statistics Server (SSS).
• Hosting the statistics proxy agent for the Zone Controller as a source for historical reports statistics.

Zone Database Server

The ZDS handles a variety of tasks, including:
• Hosting the zone configuration database.
• Administering the standard and optional applications licenses.
• Authenticating network manager users accessing the system.
• Performing backend support services for user applications.
• Handling telephone interconnect record processing.

Unified Event Manager Server

The Unified Event Manager server handles most fault management tasks for the system. Unified Event
Manager handles device discovery, supervision, and synchronization.

Zone Statistics Server

The Zone Statistics Server (ZSS) collects and stores zone-wide statistics regarding call processing
traffic and air interface load. It derives this information from the Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA)
stream supplied by the Air Traffic Router and from the sites. The ZSS serves up this information to the
Zone Historical Reports application, which is used to map out zone resource usage and performance.

7.3.1.5
Cluster-Level Servers
The following sections describe cluster-level servers.

User Configuration Server

User Configuration Server (UCS) provides database storage and backend processes required for most
system wide functions. Included are the radio records, talkgroup records, and services to automatically
distribute and replicate these records in Zone Database Server (ZDS) for all zones in a multizone
system. Only one UCS is required per single or multizone system. UCS is accessible to authorized
users from any client PC in the single or multizone system. UCS is installed together with System
Statistics Server (SSS) on the same physical server.
To configure information for users during various stages of the system's life User Configuration
Manager (UCM) is used. UCM spans cluster-level and zone-level configuration information. You can
configure the following types of information:

160
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

• System Configuration - Configuration of cluster-level parameters, such as Adjacent Control

Channels (ACCs).
• Radios - Configuration of talkgroups, multigroups, and radio users.
• Security - Configuration of records that control cluster management functions.
• System Health Application Suite Configuration - Configuration of zone-level parameters for System
Health Application Suite.
• External Configuration - Registration and configuration of all zones, RF sites, and call routes that
have been configured in other clusters of the system.

System Statistics Server

System Statistics Server (SSS) is the data repository for the statistics necessary to drive system wide
System Historical Reports. SSS is required only with multizone systems. Statistics such as the number
of calls, push-to-talks, and busies are accumulated over preset time intervals. Data accumulated on an
hourly basis for 10 days, daily for 62 days, and monthly for one year. SSS is installed together with
User Configuration Server (UCS) on the same physical server.

7.3.2
Core Services
In addition to the user applications, the NM system performs a number of vital tasks and “core”
services essential to its operation and maintenance. Network manager user authentication is one of the
core tasks performed in conjunction with the ZDS. Another is the Application Launcher on client
workstations from where each user application is started. The applications available to the user are
displayed in a Microsoft® Explorer window; the License Manager running on the ZDS “checks out” a
user license for the selected and authorized application.
The NM system also time synchronizes the servers using Network Time Protocol (NTP) time
synchronization. The ZDS serves as a secondary master clock if the primary, GPS-based reference at
the MSO is not available. Finally, since the servers are interdependent, a Database Blocking process
notifies users if the database is being shut down (such as for required maintenance) and terminates
any open sessions.
The NM provides the capability to backup each database to DAT-format cassettes. Since the UCS
database is replicated in each ZDS, the system includes an application to rebuild the UCS database
from the ZDS, thus providing an automatic backup of the user configuration database.

7.4
FCAPS Model in the DIMETRA System
This section details the FCAPS model as it applies to DIMETRA systems. Many applications deal with
one or more areas in the model. Where necessary, single character symbols are used:
• F for Fault Management
• C for Configuration Management
• A for Accounting Management
• P for Performance Management
• S for Security Management

7.4.1
Fault Management
Fault Management encompasses fault detection, fault isolation, and correction of abnormal operation.
Central fault management tasks include:

161
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

• Monitoring status history for a system and its components.

• Displaying system fault information.
• Performing diagnostics on components as needed.
Unified Event Manager is the fault management application for DIMETRA systems. Unified Event
Manager provides a centralized view of the operational status of an entire multizone or single zone
system by displaying intuitive, graphical representations (subsystem topology maps) of the system.
Problems are identified rapidly when they occur. Functions and tools also provide the ability to notify
support personnel, track, diagnose, and correct faults in an effective manner. Unified Event Manager
also maintains a data warehouse, storing up to 30 days of event history for report generation.
Unified Event Manager offers an SNMP trap message forwarding capability to pass fault information to
a higher level “Enterprise” network manager through a separate Network Interface Card (NIC).

7.4.2
Configuration Management
Configuration Management gives the operator an interface for configuring the system. The interface
specifies the operational parameters of devices used within a system, such as sites, base radios,
switches, radios, individual users, and groups. Configuration Management establishes each
component in the system, its relationship to other components, and the associated parameters of the
component.

7.4.2.1
Configuration Management Applications
Configuration Management applications provide a point of entry for configuring devices in the system.
NM applications manage configuration information at two levels: the cluster level and the zone level.

Cluster-Level Configuration: User Configuration Manager

User Configuration Manager (UCM) is the network management application used to enter and maintain
cluster-level configuration information. Through UCM, the system manager can configure radios,
talkgroups, critical sites, adjacent control channels, and security information at a cluster level. UCM
database stores parameters that govern access to the system and its features for the users. Stored
information includes:
• Identities, including radio serial number, user identifier, and group memberships.
• Radio user capabilities, such as priority level and the ability to place and receive telephone calls.
• Group and Multigroup capabilities, such as priority levels, and group memberships in multigroups.
• Radio user and group access to each site in the system. A network manager can limit a radio user
or group to one site or a group of sites, prohibiting them from using other sites in the system.
• Operator information, such as privileges, passwords, network access, and identification.

Zone Level Configuration: Zone Configuration Manager

Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) is a tool used to configure information for the radio system
infrastructure (for example, Zone Controller, Site Controllers, base stations, and telephone interconnect
devices) during various life stages of the system. Every zone has a ZCM to manage infrastructure in
the zone, and each zone can support up to 100 sites, each with different infrastructure equipment.
Types of information managed by ZCM includes radio system infrastructure information for sites and
equipment.

162
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

7.4.3
Accounting Management
Accounting Management enables charges to be established for the use of resources in the system.
The central tasks accomplished within accounting management include:
• Informing users of costs incurred and resources consumed.
• Enabling accounting limits to be set and tariff schedules to be associated with resource use.
• Enabling costs to be combined where multiple resources are invoked to achieve a given
communication objective.
The NM subsystem provides an optional licensed interface, Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA), to
which third-party applications can interface for the purpose of collecting individual radio unit and
talkgroup traffic data. The ATIA stream provides information on the activity of individual radio users and
talkgroups, including number of calls, total call duration, number of busies, total busy time, and so on.
This data can be used as input to an external accounting or billing package. Both intra- and interzone
data is passed through the interface.

Air Traffic Information Access Data

This interface provides the raw air traffic data for intrazone calls. With the addition of third-party
products or services, ATIA allows the system owner/operator to generate billing information to charge
individual departments or agencies for their use of the system.

Cluster-Level Air Traffic Information Access Packets

Cluster-Level ATIA Packets provides air traffic data for interzone calls in a multizone system.

Air Traffic Information Access Logger and Log Tab

The ATIA Logger records daily worth of ATIA packets and stores them on the Air Traffic Router. The
log may be viewed on a client PC.

Data Services Billing — Packet Data

The Packet Data Charging service is a feature that provides a billing system of a customer with raw
data on utilization of each radio within the DIMETRA Packet Data service. The utilization of the packet
data service is captured in the Call Detail Records (CDRs). Based on this data radios can be charged
for the usage of the Packet Data bearer service.
The billing feature allows charging of every IP datagram routed to and from the DIMETRA system.

Data Services Billing — Short Data

The Short Data Billing system allows charges to be made for every transmitted short data message in
a DIMETRA system. The Billing Information is stored on hard disk drives and can be downloaded
(polled) by the customer via the standard FTP protocol. The customer is responsible for the
specification and provision of a suitable Downstream Billing Processor (DBP). It is possible to switch
SDS Billing on and off.
The Billing Mode, Billing Triggers, and other billing parameters are configured locally at each Billing
Node (SDR).
The billing system is monitored by the Unified Event Manager sub system and in case of any fault
Unified Event manager is notified by an alarm from the related SDR.

163
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

7.4.4
Performance Management
Performance Management tools are used to monitor, collect, log, and evaluate network performance
and resource utilization data. Performance applications for the radio resources are described here.
NM collects statistics of radio resource usage in the Zone Statistics Server (ZSS) and System Statistics
Server (SSS) for radio units, talkgroups, channels, sites, zones, and system-wide activity report
generation.
Separate, performance applications display real-time communications activity or collect traffic statistics
over predetermined intervals for report generation. Historical statistics are aggregated into detailed and
summarized reports on both an individual site, zone, and system-wide basis. Statistics are available on
an hourly basis for 10 days, daily for 62 days, and monthly for one year at a zone, site, channel, and
user. Other statistics that are useful in troubleshooting, sizing, and monitoring the system are also
collected. The system logs these statistics for a period of 62 days. NM also has archival and export
features for saving reports or offline data analysis.

Zone Historical Reports Application

This application produces reports on radio infrastructure, radio resource usage, and air interface usage
within an identified zone. A predefined set of reports, with field selection capability, is supplied to
produce “standard” or tailored reports. Custom reports can be developed using Historical Reports
underlying Crystal Reports® reporting engine.
Historical reports are generated automatically or on demand. Automatic reports are produced at a
specific scheduled time and date or on a recurring time and date interval. Reports can be sent to the
monitor screen, a printer, or saved as PDF, XML, HTML or CSV files.

System Wide Historical Reports

The system-wide Historical Reports application is introduced with the NM system for multizone
systems. Radio traffic statistics from multizones, including interzone traffic, are accumulated in the
System Statistics Server and collated to produce system-wide reports.

System Health Application Suite

System Health Application Suite is a performance management tool having customizable displays and
grids to monitor real time system communications activity. The information displayed can help system
managers be proactive in making better resource planning decisions, such as when additional
channels need to be added to busier sites.
System Health Application Suite also provides a dynamic view of the sites to which all operating units
are currently registered, displaying zone, site, and talkgroup details. This feature makes it easy to track
and troubleshoot radios in the system.
For detailed information on System Health Application Suite and its tabs, see Private Radio Network
Management Suite Applications on page 174.

7.4.5
Security Management
Security Management controls or limits access to applications, certain features, and configuration data
according to definable access privileges. All users must identify themselves to the system at logon by
entering a name/ID and a password. The Agency Partitioning feature makes it easy to grant or restrict
access by department, location, user type, application, and function.

164
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Temporary Disable
DIMETRA allows a network management operator to temporarily disable or re-enable a radio over the
air. The radio is unable to make or receive calls while it is disabled, even if the radio is turned off and
turned back on. If the radio is turned on, it is still registered in the system and is able to roam.

Permanent Disable
As well as Temporary Disable, Permanent Disable is also intended to protect a network from attack
from a compromised or faulty radio. It shall be used when the radio is known to have been
compromised, or has been suspected of compromise for a long time.
Permanent disable of radio subscription, signaled by ITSI, allow disable of subscription either of the
integrated radio, or of SIM where a SIM is used. Unlike the temporary disable feature, mutual
authentication is a precondition for permanent disable.
Performing Permanent Disable has a following effect:
• All services are switched off.
• No MMI functions are displayed.
• All input and output ports are left in an inactive state.
• All air interface keys stored in memory of the radio are deleted.
• All identities stored in the codeplug, including its own ID (ITSI), and associated system identities are
deleted.
• The codeplug is marked as radio permanently disabled.
• The codeplug is not recoverable or editable once it enters this state and can be only over-written
with a new codeplug.
Permanent Disable is a one-way function, there is no equivalent enable function. The radio requires
recovery and reprogramming before it can be used again.

User Client Security

User Client Security provides the first level of security by denying access to all network management
applications unless the user enters a valid logon name/ID and the corresponding password.

Security Partitioning
Optional Security Partitioning allows a system administrator to assign access privileges to specific
applications. These applications include Configuration Manager, RCM, System Historical Reports, and
System Health Application Suite. The system administrator can also grant or restrict access to
multizone.

Authentication
Authentication prevents hostile or other unauthorized radios from registering with the system.
Authentication sends a challenge to a registering radio. The radio must supply the appropriate
response to access the system. If mutual authentication is being used, then the radio also sends a
challenge to the infrastructure, and the infrastructure must supply a proper response. This ensures that
both the infrastructure and the radio are both genuine.
Authentication relies on a separate secret key for each radio provisioned in the cluster. This key is
provisioned in the Provisioning Centre, Authentication Centre, and in the radio. For the Provisioning
Centre and Authentication Centre, each key is stored in a secure form in a database encrypted with a
tamper-proof crypto card. The keys are also stored in a secure form in the radio. The Provisioning
Centre is isolated from the network.

165
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Air Interface Encryption

Air interface encryption provides security for information that is being transmitted between the radios
and the system infrastructure. Encryption prevents scanners and other more sophisticated equipment
from collecting any intelligible traffic from users in the system. Encryption also prevents unauthorized
users from being able to operate on the system without the appropriate key.
The DIMETRA system offers various air interface security features. For details, see the following table.

Table 13: Air Interface Encryption - Security Features

Security Feature Purpose

Air Interface Encryption - Dynamic Keys (DCK, Encryption of a user and signaling data over the
GCK, CCK). air interface using dynamically generated keys
to protect against eavesdropping.
Air Interface Encryption - Static Keys (TM-SCK, Encryption of a user and signaling data over the
DM-SCK). air interface using predefined keys to protect
against eavesdropping.
Over The Air Re-keying (OTAR). Low-cost key management.

Air interface encryption relies on Static Cipher Keys (TM-SCK used for encryption in Trunked Mode
operation and DM-SCK used for encryption in Direct Mode operation) which are provisioned in the
Provisioning Centre, Authentication Centre, and the individual radios. For the Provisioning Centre and
Authentication Centre, these keys are stored in a secure form in a database encrypted with a tamper-
proof crypto card. The keys are also stored a secure form in the radios. The Provisioning Centre is
isolated from the network.
Neither Static Keys nor Dynamic Keys (DCK, GCK, CCK) are distributed over the air. However,
Common Cipher Keys (CCKs), which are used for group calls, are sealed with a DCK and sent over
the air to radios for group calls as well as MGCK – the combination of GCK and CCK. The typical
duration for the use of a CCK and DCK in the system is 24 hour and for GCK – 3 months.

7.5
Multizone Fault Management
Multizone fault management can be achieved through a network management client that has access to
Unified Event Manager applications in each individual zone in the system. Since one Unified Event
Manager server acts as a zone-level server in each zone, the client can view a zone connecting with
the Unified Event Manager in the appropriate zone within a particular zone.

166
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Figure 64: Multizone Fault Management - Client Access to Each Zone

Zone 1
Zone 2
UEM
UEM

Zone 3
Zone 4
UEM
UEM

NM
Client

Multizone fault management can also be arranged through the forwarding of events to a central
customer-supplied fault management system. This central fault management system can receive the
forwarded traps from all zone-level Unified Event Manager servers in the system. The figure below
illustrates the event forwarding from each zone Unified Event Manager server to a customer-supplied
fault management platform.
Figure 65: Multizone Fault Management- Event Forwarding to a Customer-Supplied Fault
Management System

Zone 1
Zone 2
UEM
UEM

Zone 3
Zone 4
UEM
UEM

Manager Events
of Forwarded
Managers

7.5.1
Multicluster Network Management
Network Management of a multicluster system can be achieved through a network management client
that is properly configured with access to the individual clusters and zones. The properly configured
client can access and modify settings in each of the clusters and their corresponding zones.
The DIMETRA system supports centralized fault management collection for the entire system through
a Manager of Managers platform.

167
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

7.5.2
Multicluster Configuration Management
Multicluster configuration management can be achieved through an NM client. Properly configured
network management clients can centrally access and modify the configuration settings each cluster
individually in the system.
Figure 66: Multicluster Network Management - Client Access to Each Cluster

UCS

UCS

UCS

UCS

NM
Client

7.5.2.1
User Configuration Server API
Each UCS also provides an API, which provides an interface for a customer-supplied provisioning
system that can be used for centralized nationwide configuration. This allows a centralized,
coordinated configuration of all the clusters throughout the system. It also helps to eliminate any
conflicts of radio users, talkgroups, dispatch call services, and interconnect call services across
different clusters. The figure illustrates nationwide provisioning using the UCS API.

168
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Figure 67: Multicluster Configuration Management - Provisioning through the UCS API

UCS
UCS

UCS

UCS

Customer Configuration
Provisioning Data
Client

Certain objects must be coordinated between clusters to allow radios to roam between clusters, to
define call routes across clusters, to define adjacent remote sites between clusters, and to support
talkgroups and multigroups with members in multiple clusters. The UCS API supports provisioning and
coordination of the following objects in multiple clusters:
• Radio
• Radio User
• Radio User Capability Profile
• Radio User Interconnect Profile
• Talkgroup
• Multigroup
• Home Zone Mapping
• BTS Site
• Call Route
• External Call Route
Call routes and BTS site objects are defined in the individual zones in each cluster. The UCS API
allows these parameters to be uploaded from one cluster and downloaded into another cluster. Home
zone mapping must be identical in all clusters.

7.5.2.2
Infrastructure Reports
The Infrastructure Reports provides daily reports of selected infrastructure configuration data in a
machine-readable format. The reports can be collected and used for system documentation,
configuration control, configuration change audit – or any other purpose. The reports are provided for
two boxes in the DIMETRA system: Zone Database Server (ZDS) and Short Data Router (SDR). The
Infrastructure Reports are provided as files generated at a particular point in time during the night. The
files can be collected using FTP, using a special account for report collection. The format of the files is
XML. The format is both ideal for use by computer programs, and for reading by human beings.

169
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

It is the responsibility of a system external to the DIMETRA system to collect the XML files. The
interface does not provide any mechanism to ensure that files are collected, and the files on ZDS and
SDR are overwritten after one day.
Figure 68: Infrastructure Reports Architecture

Extractor
DB

ZDS 1 Collector

XML Files

Extractor
DB Customer System

ZDS 2

Extractor
DB

SDR

UCS does not provide a report interface. As all relevant data are replicated to ZDS, UCS data is
available using ZDS. Note that this implies that all ZDSs in a cluster provide identical UCS data.
The following data is available from ZDS:
Zone
Contains numerous call control and similar, related parameters. Zone specific.
BTS
Contains numerous call control and similar, related parameters. Zone specific.
BTS Base Radio
Mainly included to ensure that Base Radios are not added or deleted by mistake. Zone specific.
BTS Receiver
As Base Radio. Zone specific.
BTS Channel
Contains a number of call control and data-related parameters. Zone specific.
System Object
Contains numerous parameters with cluster-wide scope. Identical for all ZDSs in a cluster.
Data System Object
Contains numerous data-related parameters with cluster-wide scope. Identical for all ZDSs in a
cluster.
Adjacent Control Channel
Contains data changed due to RF planning changes. Identical for all ZDSs in a cluster.
For SDR, all configuration information is available.

170
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

7.5.3
Multicluster Performance Management
Multicluster performance management can be achieved through a properly configured network
management client. The client can generate historical reports for each cluster individually. The client
can also run InfoVista® reports for routers in each cluster individually.
Figure 69: Multicluster Performance Management - Client Access to Each Cluster

sss
InfoVista sss
InfoVista

sss
InfoVista
sss
InfoVista
NM
Client

7.5.4
Multicluster User Configuration Server Synchronization
The UCS Synchronization Tool automates the exchange of the most important and numerous types of
infrastructure configuration data between clusters. This tool supports the synchronization of the
following records from a central location:
• Home zone mapping
• BTS sites
• Call routes
BTS sites and call routes can be extracted from one cluster and inserted into some or all other clusters.
A specific home zone mapping table can be extracted from one cluster and inserted into some or all
other clusters.
The UCS Synchronization Tool also supports import/export for offline updates of the home zone
mapping tables. A home zone mapping table can be extracted from a cluster and saved to a file for
offline updates. The updated home zone table can then be loaded into some or all other clusters.

7.5.5
Multicluster Authentication Centre Synchronization
One AuC in a multicluster system is manually chosen as the master AuC. If the master AuC becomes
unavailable, the remaining AuCs choose a new master among themselves. The master AuC distributes
Static Cipher Keys (SCKs), Common Cipher Keys (CCKs), and system KEK (KEKm) to the other
cluster AuCs in the system. This distribution can be commanded by an AuC administrator or can be
performed automatically according to a defined schedule.

171
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

During an update, each cluster AuC receives the keys and administers the key update to its local
cluster. Each cluster AuC then responds to the master AuC with the status of the update. All the AuCs
in the system must be operational when a key update is in progress.
NOTICE: Authentication material is managed locally by each AuC, independent of the master
AuC.

7.6
Network Management Applications Overview
Several applications are used to manage, monitor, and troubleshoot your radio system. This chapter
offers a brief description of these programs, along with their key features and information how to
access them.
A network management application is a software tool that helps you to manage a complex radio
communications system and its components, including radios, computers, and networking
components.
Network management applications provide the following benefits for radio system networks:
• Minimize system downtime and maintenance costs.
• Maximize available resources by assisting with system resource planning.
• Simplify monitoring and control of systems.
• Reduce human intervention through monitoring.
• Provide system security.
• Reduce troubleshooting time.
• Provide reporting tools to optimize system usage.
• Provide near real-time monitoring.

7.6.1
Motorola PRNM Suite Applications Overview
The PRNM Suite is a set of software applications or tools developed by Motorola Solutions to manage
your radio system and its components, such as resources, users, and infrastructure.
The following figure shows the areas impacted by the PRNM Suite applications.

172
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Figure 70: PRNM Applications From a System Perspective

Cluster

Zone

Site

Unit

The following table lists the Motorola PRNM Suite applications. These management applications are
available through Application Launcher.

Table 14: Motorola PRNM Suite Applications

FCAP
Applications Purpose
S
Application Launcher N/A A launch point for PRNM applications.
Cluster-Level Applications:
System Historical Reports AP A reporting tool that uses predefined reports to show da-
ta from archived information.
Software Download C A tool that provides software upgrades to specific devi-
ces.
License Manager P License Manager for the DIMETRA System utilizes li-
censing solutions by Flexera to provide access to a pool
of services.
User Configuration Manager CS The primary tool to configure and manage radio network
users.
Zone-Level Applications:
System Health Application FAP An application used to monitor radio call traffic for indi-
Suite vidual zones and sites in real time.
Unified Event Manager in- FPS The primary fault management tool that you can use to
cludes: monitor the status of the system. Unified Event Manager
spans system and zone-level activity in the figure above.
• Unified Event Manager
Administration

173
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

FCAP
Applications Purpose
S

• Unified Event Manager

Web Browser
• Unified Event Manager

Zone Historical Reports AP A reporting tool that uses predefined reports to show da-
ta from archived information. Historical Reports spans
zone, site, and unit levels in the figure above.
Radio Control Manager Re- AP A reporting tool that provides reports on radio activity.
ports
Radio Control Manager CS The primary tool used to control and monitor radio activi-
ty. Has configuration capability in the Dynamic regroup-
ing feature. Radio Control Manager spans zone, site,
and unit levels in the figure above.
Zone Configuration Manager C The primary tool used to configure infrastructure equip-
ment and other zone-level parameters.
License Manager P License Manager for the DIMETRA System utilizes li-
censing solutions by Flexera to provide access to a pool
of services.

7.6.2
Other Motorola Applications
The following table lists other Motorola Solutions applications that are used to configure RF
infrastructure equipment and radios.

Table 15: Other Motorola Applications

FCAP
Application Purpose
S
DIMETRA BTS (Base CF A tool used to configure and service the Site Controllers and
Transceiver Station) BTS base radios.
Customer Programming C A tool that programs radios. You can also use it to learn the
Software (CPS) operating parameters, personalities, and modes of radios.
This software is documented in the CPS application for your
radio. The CPS Online Help is available from the Help menu.

7.6.3
Private Radio Network Management Suite Applications
The PRNM Suite is a set of software applications developed by Motorola Solutions to manage your
radio system and its components, such as resources, users, and infrastructure.
The following sections describe the PRNM Suite applications, including how to access the applications
using Application Launcher.

Application Launcher
Application Launcher is the starting point to access the PRNM Suite applications. Application Launcher
provides a quick and easy way to access one or more management applications without going through

174
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

the process of logging on to each application separately and entering your user name and password
each time.
Application Launcher provides two ways to access the applications: Start menu and Windows Explorer.
You can launch applications from the Start menu or Windows Explorer that is launched from a desktop
icon. The system manager assigns permissions to each user in the cluster. These permissions
determine which applications, security groups, and objects you can access. These permissions also
determine your view of the system by displaying only the cluster-level applications, zones, and zone-
level applications for which you have access permissions in the Windows Explorer.
Application Launcher allows you access to the applications that manage and monitor the clusters and
zones. It also allows you to do the following:
• View applications available for the cluster and for each zone.
• Change and store your password.
• Change server access.
• Exit Application Launcher in a secure manner so that the next user is prompted to log on.

System Health Application Suite

System Health Application Suite lets you monitor radio call traffic for individual zones and sites in real
time.
System Health Application Suite that operates in the DIMETRA ISI zone does not display information
about talkgroups, sites, security group, or talkgroup aliases. The information displayed in the System
Health Application Suite includes registered radio, the time of its registration and deregistration. For
more information about the ISI zone, see Motorola Intersystem Interface.
The application uses different views that allow you to display only the information you want to see.
System Health Application Suite displays the association of a radio with a talkgroup and site, and
information about channels and busy calls. It enables you to monitor how radio users travel between
different sites in a zone and how they communicate with other members of their assigned talkgroup
and those outside of their talkgroup.
The application also displays low-level logs monitoring events in the zone and shows trends in busy
calls in real time.
System Health Application Suite includes five tabs:
• Overview Tab
• Site Activity Tab
• Busy Calls Tab
• Affiliations Tab
• ATIA Log Tab

Overview Tab
The Overview tab in System Health Application Suite provides near real-time call data collection and
allows to display usage trends and patterns of activity for effective monitoring and reporting.
The information about the traffic can be displayed in two modes:
• From the last hour
• From the last two minutes
The screen is divided into four sections:

175
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Active Calls
Provides information about active calls in the zone, allows you to filter the displayed data by call
type and save an image of the graph presenting the current state.
Multizone Calls
Provides information about the traffic between zones and enables you to save an image of the
graph presenting the current state of the system.
Busy Calls
Provides information about calls that were not processed, allows you to filter the displayed data by
call type and save an image of the graph presenting the current state. On the right, Top Busy
Reasons/Total provides reasons for calls not processed by the system, and their total number.
Rejects
Provides information about calls, affiliations, and registrations rejected by the system and reasons
behind the rejections.
The Active Calls, Busy Calls, Top Busy Reasons/Total, and Rejects sections provide an option to
download a .csv report.

Site Activity Tab

The Site Activity tab in System Health Application Suite allows you to monitor radio call traffic for an
individual zone in real time. This tab uses site widgets which allow you to display only the information
you need to see.
Examples of trunking activity and radio call traffic displayed in Site Widgets include the following
information:
• Site name, site ID, and site type
• Control Channels load indicators
• Status – site reported severity
• Status – Zone Controller reported severity
• Number of affiliations at a specific site
• Number of active and busy calls at a specific site
• Tooltip with channel details
• Channel severity
The Site Activity tab monitors all radio call activity by pulling trunking information from the Air Traffic
Router (ATR) server, which receives updates from the Air Traffic Information Access (ATIA) stream
distributed by the Zone Controller.
The Site Activity tab allows to apply filters to limit the display of sites and channels. The following
filters are available:
Status
Enables filtering sites and channels with a specific status. The following status types are available:
• Critical
• Major
• Minor
• Warning
• Clear
• Unknown

176
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

NOTICE: For RF Sites two values of severity are displayed: ZC reported and Site reported.
As you hover the mouse over the site severity, a tooltip with text indicating the source of
data is displayed.
Sites
Enables searching a particular site based on a site ID or site alias.

Busy Calls Tab

The Busy Calls tab in System Health Application Suite displays all busy calls within the monitored
zone.
The line graph shows changes in the number of busy calls. This information can be displayed in two
modes:
Entire hour
Displays the information for the entire hour at 30-second intervals.
Two minutes
Displays the information for the last two minutes at 1-second intervals.
The Busy Calls tab allows to apply filters to display only selected types of busy calls. The following
filters are available:
• Busy Group Calls
• Busy Individual Calls
• Busy Emergency Calls
• Busy Data Calls
The Busy Calls list provides detailed information on busy calls that occurred. The information is
displayed in the following fields:
Call Type
Identifies the call type: Talkgroup, Multigroup, Multiselect, Patch, Private, Phone.
Duration and Reason
Specifies the time elapsed since the call is in a busy state and the reason for the busy state.
Source
Identifies the ID/alias of a source radio/talkgroup participating in a call.
Target
Identifies the ID/alias of a target radio/talkgroup participating in a call.
Resources
Specifies the resources that are the reason for the busy state.

Affiliations Tab
The Affiliations tab in System Health Application Suite monitors the mobility of radios for a particular
zone. Mobility describes how radio users travel between different sites in a zone, and how they
communicate with other members of their assigned talkgroup, or with members outside of their
talkgroup. You can view a specific radio in more than one zone.
As a radio roams from one site to another or changes talkgroups, the Affiliations tab updates and
displays the affiliation and deaffiliation information for the monitored radio. This information can be
useful for troubleshooting and tracking of radios in the system, and for monitoring the movement of
traffic within a zone.
The information is displayed in two default sections:
Radios
Shows the basic information about all the radios in the system.

177
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Talkgroups
Shows the basic information about all the talkgroups in the system.
The Affiliations tab allows to apply filters to display only selected radio affiliations. The following filters
are available:
Radio
Displays a radio with a specific ID or alias. The filter can be used multiple times to show more than
one radio.
Type
Displays affiliations per type: radios and/or talkgroups.
State
Displays radios with a specific state:
• Affiliated
• Deregistered
• Registered
Sites
Displays affiliations to a specific site and scanned talkgroups based on a site ID or alias.
Talkgroup
Displays affiliations to a specific talkgroup based on a talkgroup ID or alias.
Security group
Displays affiliations to a specific security group based on a security group ID or alias.
NOTICE: In the ISI zone, the following filters are active:
• Radio
• State (registered or deregistered)

ATIA Log Tab

The ATIA Log tab in System Health Application Suite allows you to examine the air traffic data in the
monitored zone.
By default, the tab displays events as they occur in real time, one by one. The following view options
are available:
Clear
Clears the view to display only the new events.
Freeze
Stops updating with new data. Only the data that was recorded before selecting the view option is
visible.
Live View
Resumes updating the log.
The ATIA Log tab in System Health Application Suite allows you to access the following features:
• View real-time radio events occurring in the zone in a raw data format from the Air Traffic Router
(ATR).
• Download historical air traffic data in a specified zone for a particular time interval or intervals. This
feature is normally used to examine data logs when debugging the system.
NOTICE: You must first enable ATIA data logging through the ATR server's Administration
menu. Otherwise, no ATIA log data is collected for viewing. For detailed information, see Master
Site Core Elements, Network Management Subsystem. Data for Historical Reports is collected
regardless of the ATIA log setting.

178
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

The ATIA Log tab records ATIA data packets on the ATR server. The data is displayed on an hourly
basis, and you can select which interval packets you want to view. The data is displayed in an easy-to-
read format and can be printed or saved for future evaluation. Since the information displayed in the
ATIA Log tab is a text document, you can format the information, if required, using a third-party
application.

Custom Historical Reports

Custom Historical Reports is very similar to System Historical Reports. Like System Historical Reports,
it uses a third-party application (Seagate® Crystal Reports®) but the difference is that you can create
your own reports. You select the parameters for the report instead of using predefined parameters and
templates that System Historical Reports uses.
If you need to customize your performance reports (zone-level and cluster-level Historical Reports
only), the Custom Historical Reports is a software package that allows you to modify existing report
templates and create new templates to meet your system needs.
Using a report generator, you create a customized report with the parameters that you want. Custom
Historical Reports uses Crystal Reports® to step you through a series of dialog boxes to define each
set of parameters that you could include in the report.
Custom Historical Reports has the following features:
• The Report Expert wizard from Crystal Report® allows you to select from parameters collected by
the ATIA stream or other reports.
• Reports may be customized to suit your individual needs. Customization includes:
- Group and sorting
- Charts (bar, line, 3-D)
- Top and bottom X filtering
- Calculated values
- Cross tab, form, form letter, drill-down reports
• Special formulas can be included in Custom Historical Reports to create certain effects.

Unified Event Manager

Unified Event Manager is a PRNM Suite application that is the primary fault management tool for your
system. You can use Unified Event Manager to monitor the status of the zones.
Unified Event Manager allows you to monitor the status of components at zone level, such as servers,
Zone Controllers, or sites in the zone. The zone level submap displays only one zone.
Unified Event Manager is the primary troubleshooting tool that allows you to view alarm information.
You use Unified Event Manager to monitor the status of devices in the zone.
• Submap views show the status of devices by color and the graphical representations of alarm
information.
• Alarm Categories show different categories of alarms, for the radio system, routers, or other
devices.
• Alarms Browsers show a record of what devices are sending alarms or events.
Unified Event Manager communicates with managed RF system devices using Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP), the industry standard communication protocol.
Unified Event Manager integrates the fault management of Motorola Solutions devices and that of
approved third-party devices.

179
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

System/Zone Historical Reports

Historical Reports is a PRNM Suite application that allows you to generate reports for cluster-wide
activity and for individual zones. These reports display data that is stored on the server. You can use
Historical Reports for resource management. For example, you can determine if interconnect
resources are being overused because too many interconnect calls appear in the report. Historical
Reports allows you to do long-term analysis of traffic data.
The Historical Reports application generates reports of statistical data that is gathered at specific,
predefined time intervals. You can then create reports from this data to monitor and analyze
information about zones, sites, channels, talkgroups, and radio users. This data is displayed using
predefined report templates and parameters. Historical Reports is based on a third-party application
(Seagate® Crystal Reports®).
Historical Reports uses predefined report templates and specified time intervals to create a report. You
can use Historical Reports to perform the following actions with the report:
• Viewing the reports on screen or printing a hard copy.
• Exporting the report to one of the following formats:
- CSV – Creates a text file where entries are separated by commas. This format is suitable for
export to database applications, such as Microsoft® Access.
- HTML – Creates an HTML version of the report. This format is suitable for viewing in a number of
external applications such as web browsers and word processors.
• Use the Report Scheduler window to schedule zone-wide and system-wide reports to occur
automatically at specified times with an output to a printer or data file.

Radio Control Manager

Radio Control Manager (RCM) is a PRNM Suite application used to monitor radio events, issue and
monitor commands, and make informational queries of the system.
RCM enables you to monitor and manage radio events and commands and to search the database for
radio status information. Using RCM, you can perform the following actions:
• Submit radio commands over the air, select radios to receive the commands, and track the progress
of the commands. After you issue a radio command, you can view the command and its status in
the Command Monitor.
• Submit queries to check the status of the radio.
• Monitor events in real time as the information becomes available in the system. An event is an
unsolicited message sent from a radio or a solicited command. You can view and acknowledge
radio events in the system.
• Create reports. You can create reports for emergency alarms, logon sessions, and radio commands
using the RCM Reports application.
NOTICE: All monitoring displays are updated in near real time as the information becomes
available in the system.

Software Download Manager

The Software Download (SWDL) Manager is a PRNM Suite application used to transfer and install new
software from a central location at the zone core or locally at a remote site. Software Download
supports loading to the Site Controllers and base stations.
The SWDL Manager allows you to do the following tasks:
• Download software to Site Controllers and base stations.
• Upload log files from Site Controllers and base stations.

180
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

• The configuration can be manipulated using a script installed on the NM client. After being
manipulated or changed using the script, the configuration file can be downloaded to the base
station again by the Software Download application. There is a single configuration file set for the
base station which can be downloaded to the Site Controller.
• When using the Software Download application, base station software files can be downloaded to
more than one base station in parallel.
• Determine the software version.
• Obtain device IP information.
• Query the Site Controller for the number of channels at the RF site.
• Purge (delete) a software version from selected target devices.
• Audit a session using historical information recorded by SWDL Manager.

License Manager Server

The License Manager server is installed on the designated Primary Core Server with the KVM
Hypervisor. A redundant instance of a license manager may also be deployed if a Secondary Core
Server exists within the system. The DIMETRA system requires one License Manager server per zone
to store and manage licenses for the zone. Additionally, one of these servers is designated as the
system-level License Manager server for managing system-level licenses.
In the DIMETRA system, you need to purchase licenses to enable and use selected features. Licenses
provide access to certain services, allow you to run a specified number of sessions for the licensed
applications, and configure them for specific capacities. The DIMETRA License Manager supports only
the licenses issued by Motorola Solutions.

User Configuration Manager

User Configuration Manager (UCM) is a PRNM Suite application used to enter and maintain radio-
related configuration information for User Configuration Server (UCS).
UCM configures information for initial configuration of the system and then is used as needed to
update the information. To configure a DIMETRA system, you need to enter information into both UCM
in each cluster, and Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) in each zone. When you initially configure or
make changes in UCM, the configuration information updates UCS and is replicated to Zone Database
Server (ZDS) in each zone in the cluster.
Use UCM to perform the following tasks:
• Configure cluster-level parameters for call capability, including the Adjacent Control Channels
(ACCs) and interzone control paths.
• Configure radios, radio users, talkgroups, and multigroups.
• Configure security access for users in the system.
• Configure the zones in which users can launch System Health Application Suite, and which tabs are
available.
UCM spans cluster-level and zone-level configuration information. The table below shows the objects
classes.

Table 16: Object Classes in UCM

Object Types Description

System Configuration Configuration of cluster-level parameters, such as Adjacent Control
Channels. (ACCs) and interzone control paths.

181
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Object Types Description

Radios Configuration of zone-level parameters, such as talkgroups and radio
user information. You can also set up home zone mapping, sub-band re-
stricted mapping, and use profiles to quickly create records.
Security Configuration of cluster-level parameters for management users, such as
security information.
System Health Appli- Configuration of zone-level parameters for System Health Application
cation Suite Configu- Suite.
ration
External Configuration Registration and configuration of all zones, BTS sites, and call routes that
have been configured in other clusters of the system. Not applicable to
single-cluster systems.

Zone Configuration Manager

Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM) is a PRNM Suite application that is used to configure and maintain
operational parameters for equipment in the zone. Zone Database Server (ZDS) hosts the ZCM
database, which stores configuration information for the zone's infrastructure equipment.
To configure a DIMETRA system, you need to enter information into both ZCM and UCM.
Use ZCM to manage the infrastructure in a zone. Infrastructure refers to the physical equipment in the
zone, such as the BTS base radios, MTIGs, and the Zone Controller.
Use ZCM application to perform the following tasks:
• Configure the zone infrastructure equipment.
• Execute diagnostic commands to force a device in the zone into a certain functional state.
ZCM spans zone-level configuration information. For example, you can configure zone-level
parameters such as BTS sites. The following table shows the high-level objects.

Table 17: High-Level Objects in ZCM

Object Types Description

Zone Configures and manages the attributes relating to a zone.
Air Traffic Router Configures the ATR server, which collects statistics on the system and
distributes airtime usage data.
Zone Controller Represents the Zone Controller for the zone. Provides access to the
Rendezvous Point (RP) routers.
Level of Service Configures the level of service availability for call requests, such as the
number of interconnect calls allowed or the average maximum busy de-
lay that is acceptable for group calls or interconnect calls.
Packet Data Gateway Represents the packet data gateway.
Application Platform Configures the application platform, which hosts the MTIG application.
Provides access to the MTIG object as well as the voice and line card-
related objects.
Console Site Configures remote and collocated consoles.
BTS Site Configures the BTS site operations within a zone, setting the parameters
for a site so that it functions correctly in the system.

182
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

Object Types Description

Switch Configures the switch within a zone, plus the paths, slots, and cards, and
connections for the switch.
Interconnect Subsys- References the telephone interconnect equipment in the zone and repre-
tem sents the path selection for telephone interconnect calls.
Short Data Router Configures the short data services (such as Store&Forward or MS-To-
Group). The services are license-controlled.

7.6.4
Network Transport Management Applications
The following sections describe the launching mechanisms for the transport network management
applications. These applications are accessible through the Network Transport Management (NTM)
client.

InfoVista
InfoVista® is a customizable performance management application that interfaces with network devices
supporting SNMP. By importing Management Information Base (MIB) files, InfoVista® can report and
graph a wide variety of data from multiple devices, such as routers and core LAN switches.
InfoVista® performs the following performance management tasks:
• Collects MIB data at any specified time interval.
• Displays the collected data in daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly reports.
• Reports and graphs single and multiple device information.
• Provides customized reports using preconfigured standardized report templates for network
transport devices.
InfoVista® is primarily a performance management tool that provides individual and group report types.
Each report type has four templates to provide daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly reports.
You can use InfoVista® reports for proactive network performance, troubleshooting, and network
capacity planning. Use InfoVista® to perform the following actions:
• View Motorola Solutions custom reports for the Motorola Solutions network routers and the core
LAN switch.
• Filter (search) for a particular report.
• Navigate folders that are organized by system and zone.
• Monitor the system for troubleshooting clues. You see activity on a device and use it to troubleshoot
the device.

Transport Network Device Manager

Installed on the Network Management (NM) Client PC, the Transport Network Device Manager
(TNDM) allows you to view configuration of the transport system devices for your DIMETRA system,
and perform network management tasks, which include:
• Configuration Backup
• Configuration Batch Backup
• Configuration Restore
• Configuration Deployment
• GGSN Router Management

183
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 7: DIMETRA Network Management

• Firmware Deployment
• Setting Boot Source for the device
• Initial Configuration Setup using serial connection
• Checking firmware version
• Adding, removing and updating the site information (RF, Control, and WAVE sites)
TNDM provides configurations for the following devices and roles within your radio system. An (*) next
to the device name indicates that Transport Network Device Manager provides dedicated deployment
support for that device:
• Core Router
• Core LAN Switch
• Exit Router
• Gateway Router
• NM Dispatch Site Router, Site Switch (*), and Terminal Server
• Zone Terminal Server (*)
• Ethernet Core Gateway Router
• Ethernet Site Router
• Backhaul Switch
• Eth-Exit Router
• Eth-Core Router
• iLO Switch
• Aggregation Switch

184
 MN005775A01-A
DIMETRA Resiliency

Chapter 8

DIMETRA Resiliency
8.1
Redundancy of Critical Components
The DIMETRA system offers redundant capacity for all components that are critical to transporting
voice through the infrastructure. This means that any one component in the system can fail, and the
radios are still able to communicate via voice.
NOTICE: Redundant components can be added to other parts of the infrastructure - for
instance to ensure traffic of short data massages.
Furthermore, the system offers the possibility of geographical redundancy. With geographical
redundancy, the functioning and its redundant counterpart are placed in two different locations. This
can be done to avoid physical damage to the system that impacts both the functioning and the
redundant component.

185
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency

Figure 71: Zone with Geographical Redundancy (Example)

Geographical Location A Geographical Location B
RNG1 To PABX/PSTN To PABX/PSTN RNG2

PSMS 1 PSMS 2
PDR1 PDR2

SDR1 MTIG-E1 1 MTIG-E1 2 SDR2

ZSS1 ZSS2
Terminal Terminal
UEM1 GGSN1 GGSN2 UEM2
Server 1 Server 2
ZDS1 ZDS2

SSS1 SSS2
UCS1 UCS2
Core LAN Switch 1 & 2 Core LAN Switch 3 & 4

Secondary Core
ATR1 ATR2
Primary Core

Core Gateway/ Core Gateway/

Server
Exit Router(s) Exit Router(s)
Server

AuC1 AuC2

Backhaul Backhaul
Alias Switch1 Switch2 Alias
Server1 Server2
Base Stations Base Stations
Control Sites Control Sites
Multi Multi
Other Zones Other Zones
CADI1 CADI2
GR CENIB CENIB GR
Client FW1 FW2 Client
ZC1 ZC2

TNDM DMZ DMZ TNDM

Client Switches 1/2 Switches 3/4 Client CSMS2
CSMS1

Border Border
UIS1 Router1 Router2 UIS2

MTIG MTIG
-IP1 CEN CEN -IP2

PN PN
Routers Routers
Remote Control Site Remote Control Site

Optional Transport
Application Element Synchronization Switch
Element
Application Security
Element Element

8.2
Zone Controller Switchover in Redundant Configuration
The redundant Zone Controller in each zone provides protection against a hardware or software failure
that may result in the loss of wide area trunking until the Zone Controller is repaired or recovers
automatically. One controller actively processes calls and manages resources in the zone, while the
other controller acts as a standby that can be brought online when the active controller is being
serviced or has an internal failure that causes the loss of wide area trunking.
The two controllers communicate with each other through the link connected directly between the two
or, should that link fail, through the links connected to the core LAN switch . The direct link, also called
the negotiating link, is used by the controllers to notify each other of their ability to maintain the zone in
wide area trunking mode and to negotiate the switchover should that action be necessary. The core
LAN switch establishes the connections between the controllers and the sites, and the MTIG. Although
both controllers can receive network traffic, only one controller is actively in charge of the zone. Both
controllers maintain links to the Network Management Subsystem in order to report individual controller
status.

186
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency

The Redundant controller can be switched automatically or by user-initiated switchover. Automatic

switchover takes place upon internal failure that causes the loss of wide area trunking or loss of
dispatch operations. User-initiated switchover is done from the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM)
application in the Private Radio Network Management (PRNM) application Suite. In the event that
access through ZCM is not possible due to failure, the Local User Terminal, through the Zone
Controller Administration menu, may be used to perform the switchover.
NOTICE: Performing a user initiated switchover from the local user terminal could have adverse
affects, like increased down time, on system operation and should only be used when access
through the ZCM application is not possible.
The following explains what causes an automatic switchover and how the system reacts when an
automatic switchover occurs and when a user-initiated switchover occurs.
For information about performing the user-initiated switchover and Zone Controller redundancy and
switchover, see the Zone Controller manual.

8.2.1
Automatic Switchover
Automatic switchover occurs when a failure event within the controller causes a loss of wide area
trunking for all sites or loss of dispatch operations. The failure event can be software- or hardware-
based. The failures that trigger an automatic switchover are CPU failure, both power supplies failure,
Ethernet connectivity failure and a manual disabling from a local Administrator menu.

8.2.2
User-Initiated Switchover
IMPORTANT: Due to the severe system impact of a switchover event, user-initiated switchover
should be initiated ONLY when absolutely necessary.

User-initiated switchover is a feature that gives you the ability to disable the automatic switchover
feature and perform a user-initiated controller switchover. The feature uses the Zone Configuration
Manager (ZCM) application. If the Network Management link is down, and a user-initiated switchover
still must be performed, switchover may be done through the Zone Controller Administration menu
through the Local User Terminal. User initiated switchover is typically used when performing a software
upgrade or performing maintenance such as replacing a faulty Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) that did
not cause an automatic switchover.
IMPORTANT: Verify the health and status of the standby controller subsystem in Unified Event
Manager before performing a user-initiated switchover or take any kind of action that results in
a controller switchover.

8.2.3
System Behavior During Automatic Switchover
When an automatic switchover to the redundant controller is commanded, the following sequence of
events take place.

Process:
1 In case of failure of any crucial components causes the standby controller to compare its
operational health against the health of the active controller. An automatic switchover is initiated
if the standby controller is capable of wide area trunking.
2 If the standby controller is capable of wide area trunking, the standby controller informs the
active controller, through the negotiation link, that it is going active and the active must go to
standby.

187
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency

3 All sites in the zone lose connectivity to the controller and subsequently enter local site trunking
mode. If the controller has malfunctioned, the switch to local site trunking has probably already
occurred.
4 All active wide area calls are ended including Talkgroup, Multigroup, Interconnect, Private, and
Emergency. BTS sites revert to local site trunking mode.
5 All radios, upon receiving the local site trunking system status Outbound signaling Packet
(OSP), leave their current site and search for a site in wide area trunking. Since all sites are in
local site trunking mode, the radios return to the original site and inform the radio user of the
local site trunking mode through audible tone and, when so equipped, with a visual indication.
For more information, see Radio Scatter on page 189.
6 The sites constantly send link requests to the controller. Once the newly active controller is
online, it acknowledges the link requests to bring the sites into wide area trunking.
7 As each site transitions to wide area trunking from local site trunking, they transmit a wide area
System Status Outbound signaling Packet (OSP) to inform the radios of the change.
NOTICE: The time duration to transition from wide area trunking to local site trunking and
return to wide area trunking varies depending on system size and configuration but
should take less that two minutes.
8 If the radios ended up on a site other than their starting point during their search for a wide area
trunking site, they transmit an Inbound signaling Packet (ISP).
9 The active controller begins gathering the current location of radios and talkgroup members from
the affiliation tables sent from the sites.
NOTICE: Only limited wide area services are available until the controller receives all of
the site affiliation tables. The time to recover the site affiliation information varies
depending on the number of active radios, talkgroups, and the number of sites in the
system, but should be less that twenty minutes.
10 For multizone systems, if the active controller is the controlling zone for an interzone call, it must
also receive talkgroup affiliation information from the other zones before those zones are
included in call requests. The time required varies depending on the number of radios and
talkgroups in the system but in general should be less than 25 minutes. Before this being
completed, interzone services to other zones may be affected.
11 The newly standby controller resets and if it initializes in service mode, the controller receives
infrastructure, radio, and talkgroup information from the ZDS. This includes all infrastructure,
radio user, and talkgroup configuration information.

8.2.3.1
Possible Call Processing Behavior During Recovery
The following table lists the types of call processing disruptions that may occur during the recovery of
the primary controller. These disruptions could be caused by incomplete location and configuration
data.

Table 18: Call Processing Behavior During Recovery

Call Type Possible Disruptions

Private Calls/Telephone Inter- Calls to a target radios whose affiliation is not yet known to the
connect Calls controller are not successful.
Talkgroup/Announcement Talkgroup members need to have at least one affiliated member
Calls known by the controller at their site, to be included in talkgroup
calls.

188
 MN005775A01-A
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency

8.2.3.1.1
Radio Scatter
All of the sites transition to local site trunking mode regardless of whether a controller switchover is
automatic or user-initiated. The sites notify the radios of this change through a System Status
Outbound signaling Packet (OSP). Upon receiving this OSP, the radios automatically start scanning
the adjacent site list for another site that is still in wide area trunking mode unless the site that the radio
is currently registered to is set to Always Preferred in the radio programming. When no wide area site
is found, the radio stops scanning and returns the original site.
NOTICE: Some radios can be registered at more than one site during controller switchover.
Multiple registrations can occur if a radio happens to register to a new site while the radio is
also searching the adjacent site list for a wide-area site. Because connectivity to the controller
is temporarily lost during controller switchover, entries in some of the site registration tables do
not get updated to reflect radios who have changed sites. Normally the controller de-registers
radios when they roam out of a site, however, during a controller switchover the
communications path from the controller to the site is temporarily unavailable preventing the
controller from performing deregistration.
The site transitions to wide area trunking mode when the site reestablishes a link with the controller.
The site then notifies the radios of the change through System Status OSP.
The wide area feature called Dynamic Site Assignment requires that the controller have up-to-date
affiliation tables. All sites need to upload the affiliation tables to the controller. After the controller
receives all of the uploads from the sites, it looks through the compiled affiliation table for radios that
are registered on more than one site. If the controller finds duplicate affiliations it requests, through all
sites where the radio shows registrations, that the radio reregister. This must happen before Dynamic
Site Assignment can guarantee all intended parties are included in the call.
The length of time it takes to update the affiliation tables depends on the number of sites, radios, and
talkgroups in the system, but in general it should be less than twenty minutes from the time the first site
transitions back to wide area trunking.
As with radios, console affiliations must also be sent to the controller within the zone. This happens
within the first few minutes after the switchover occurs.
For a given talkgroup to be monitored by the dispatch subsystem, at lease one console affiliation must
be received for that talkgroup.

8.2.3.2
Switching Back to the Standby Controller (User Initiated)
IMPORTANT: Do not switch back to the standby controller until the Infrastructure database has
been downloaded from the Zone Database Server (ZDS) or the system remains in local site
trunking until the Infrastructure database has been downloaded. The download time varies by
system configuration, but in general should take less than 10 minutes.
If for some reason the newly active controller is not functioning properly, you may need to switch the
standby controller back to active. This is considered a double switchover. The following is a
description of what occurs when performing a double switchover before the standby controller has
received the user configuration database from the ZDS.

8.2.3.2.1
Infrastructure Database Download
The Zone Database Server contains infrastructure information such as the configuration information for
the site and channel capabilities. The standby, reset controller does not have any knowledge of
infrastructure objects until the database has been loaded into the controller memory.

189
MN005775A01-A
Chapter 8: DIMETRA Resiliency

NOTICE: There is no indication that the download has completed other than the controller state
changing to enabled idle or enabled active.
The controller begins acknowledging the link requests from the sites once the database is downloaded.
A link request contains information such as the site ID. The controller checks the site ID against the
information in the database and requests the site's capabilities. The controller instructs the site to
transition to wide area trunking if the capabilities are normal. The controller then requests the affiliation
tables for radios and talkgroups. This operation is performed for every site in the system. The controller
handles multiple sites simultaneously.

8.3
Service Redundancy Solution
Service Redundancy Solution (SRS) enables automatic switch-over between redundant devices. When
SRS is in automatic mode, the secondary device remains in the standby mode and its common data is
synchronized with the active device. If the active device fails, the standby device automatically takes
over the service.
SRS is available for selected devices only, currently it is used with:
• Short Data Routers (SDR)
• Packet Data Gateway (PDG)
• Air Traffic Router (ATR)
• MultiCADI
• Alias Server
The SRS should be used in automatic mode, but using UEM, the administrator can manually configure
redundancy state of the devices. Manual setup can be used when the operator wants to control which
device delivers the service.

190
 MN005775A01-A
DIMETRA System Documentation

Appendix A

DIMETRA System Documentation

This appendix provides a listing of manuals applicable to the hardware, software, and features in a
DIMETRA system.

Table 19: DIMETRA Documentation for New Systems

Document Title Description

Glossary The glossary provides definitions of terms, abbreviations, and
acronyms used in the DIMETRA system documentation.
Documentation Overview This document provides a list of all documents delivered with
your DIMETRA system.
System Overview This manual explains basic radio system concepts, call process-
ing basics, and an introduction to the various components and
processes associated with the DIMETRA system. The manual
provides the background needed to comprehend DIMETRA sys-
tem theory of operation. It also provides functional descriptions
of equipment and subsystems, and describes the role of the nu-
merous network management software applications used in the
system.
Common Client Platform Re- It also contains information on how to restore, configure, and
storation maintain the underlying hardware and Common Operating Sys-
tem (OS) of the NM Client, KMF Client, PrC, and MCC 7500-
Series consoles.
Core Server Restoration This manual describes how to perform restoration of the Pri-
mary/Secondary Core Server, including hardware, software and
data restoration of all application servers.
ISI Core Server Restoration This manual describes how to perform restoration of the Pri-
mary/Secondary ISI Core Server, including hardware, software
and data restoration of all application servers.
Zone Controller This manual describes the Zone Controller which is responsible
for processing calls, managing audio paths, controlling zone in-
frastructure, and providing services to subscribers and console
operators.
System LAN Switches This manual describes LAN switches used in the DIMETRA sys-
tem. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration and oper-
ation are included.
S6000 Router This manual describes the S6000 router used in the DIMETRA
system. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration and
operation are included.
GGM 8000 Gateway This manual describes the GGM 8000 Gateway and how it is
used in the DIMETRA system. Detailed procedures for installa-
tion, configuration and operation are included.
Cooperative WAN Routing This manual describes the Cooperative WAN Routing (CWR)
solution that allows core and exit routers to interface directly with

191
MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

site and inter-zone links through a simple, reliable, and passive
relay panel.
Link Encryption This manual describes how to set up Encryption and Authentica-
tion, which is an extension to the Ethernet Site Links (ESL) fea-
ture, on Firewalls and Base Stations.
Ethernet Site Links This manual contains information on the Ethernet Site Links
(ESL) feature, which provides the means to establish Ethernet
connections of the following types: base station links (single and
redundant), inter-zone links, and remote control site links termi-
nated at control site routers.
Network Management Servers This manual describes the Network Management (NM) Servers
used in the DIMETRA system. The NM servers are comprised of
User Configuration Server (UCS), System Statistics Server
(SSS), Zone Database Server (ZDS), Air Traffic Router Server
(ATR), Zone Statistics Server (ZSS) and Unified Event Manager
(UEM) Server. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration
and operation are included.
Network Management Client This manual provides an introduction to the hardware and soft-
ware components associated with the Network Management
(NM) Client. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration
and operation are included.
NICE Voice Logging System This manual explains how to restore the server and client plat-
Platform Restoration form (hardware and operating system) used in the NICE Voice
Logging subsystem.
Application Launcher This manual describes the Private Radio Network Management
(PRNM) Suite Application Launcher, which is used to open man-
agement applications on the DIMETRA system.
Service Access This manual describes service access via terminal server, virtual
private network (VPN) connectivity and local access connectivi-
ty.
Network Time Server This manual describes the Network Time Server (NTS), which
provides a UTC time and date reference to all IP connected sys-
tem elements (NTP clients) that support the Network Time Pro-
tocol (NTP). Detailed procedures for installation, configuration
and operation are included.
System Reference Guide This manual offers an introduction to the DIMETRA system. The
information covers the major components of the system and the
interconnection of components in the Mobile Switching Office
(MSO), as well as troubleshooting information.
Safety Guidelines for Installa- This manual describes the general safety guidelines to be fol-
tion of Hardware and Software lowed in connection with installation of hardware and software.
Clear Standalone Authentica- This manual explains how to restore the Clear version of the
tion Centre (AuC) Server Re- standalone Authentication Centre (AuC) server application and
storation the underlying server platform.
MTIG-E1 Server Restoration This manual explains how to restore the MTIG-E1 server appli-
cation and the underlying server platform.

192
 MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

Performance and Security This manual explains how to restore the Performance and Se-
Management Server Restora- curity Management applications and the underlying server plat-
tion form.
NICE Voice Logging Server This manual explains how to restore the server and client plat-
Platform Restoration form (hardware and operating system) used in the NICE Voice
Logging subsystem.
Standalone Components Re- This manual describes how to back up and restore the following
storation components of a DIMETRA system:
• Network Management (NM) Client
• Standalone Provisioning Centre (PrC) Client
• CryptR2

Network Transport Restoration This manual describes how to back up and restore system LAN
switches, routers, gateways, CWR Patch Panel, Terminal Serv-
er, and Network Time Server.
Console Sites Restoration This manual describes how to back up and restore all compo-
nents of the MCC 7500 subsystem, both its clear and secure
versions.
MTS 1: Restoration This manual describes how to back up and restore the Motorola
Transceiver System (MTS) 1. The manual also describes how to
perform FRU/FRE procedures.
MTS LiTE,MTS 2, and MTS 4: This manual describes how to back up and restore the Motorola
Restoration Transceiver System (MTS) LiTE, 2 and 4. The manual also de-
scribes how to perform FRU/FRE procedures.
Fault Management This manual provides an overview of DIMETRA system Fault
Management features and contains troubleshooting procedures.
Unified Event Manager This manual provides an introduction to the Unified Event Man-
ager (UEM). UEM is an application that provides reliable fault
management services for the DIMETRA system.
System Alarms and Events This manual lists all the possible alarms for the system. It also
covers transient alarm messages, which are known as techni-
cian messages. The manual is intended for technicians, network
management personnel, or any other engineering personnel
with responsibility for troubleshooting or monitoring the opera-
tional status of the system.
User Configuration Manager This manual describes User Configuration Manager (UCM)
which is a Windows based, Private Radio Network Management
(PRNM) Suite application. The UCM is used in the configuration
of the system. It is also used to modify configuration parameters.
To configure a system, both the UCM and the Zone Configura-
tion Manager (ZCM) are needed.
Zone Configuration Manager This manual describes Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM)
which is a Private Radio Network Management (PRMN) Suite
application. The ZCM is used to configure and maintain opera-
tional parameters for equipment in a system. To configure a sys-
tem, both the ZCM and the User Configuration Manager (UCM)
are needed.

193
MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

Call Processing and Mobility This manual describes radio features and their configuration.
Management The manual contains a configuration checklist as well as config-
uration procedures for the key features of the system.
Software Download This manual describes the Software Download (SWDL) Manag-
er which is a Private Radio Network Management (PRNM) Suite
application that can transfer and install new software in the DI-
METRA Base Transceiver Systems (BTS).
System Health Application This manual describes System Health Application Suite which is
Suite an application used to monitor radio traffic for individual zones
and sites in real time.
Radio Management This manual describes radio features available to radios in the
DIMETRA system.
Radio Control Manager This manual describes the Radio Control Manager (RCM) which
is a Private Radio Network Management (PRNM) Suite applica-
tion used primarily by dispatchers to monitor and manage radio
events, issue and monitor commands, and make informational
queries of the system database.
Fleetmapping This manual describes how to properly plan for, set up, and
manage your system. The Motorola engineering team works
with your organization to plan, and set up your system. Accurate
operational requirements are needed to ensure a successful
system plan. By properly configuring the DIMETRA system to
meet your operational needs, your organization will have the
most efficient and effective communications system available.
Performance Management This manual provides an overview of Performance Management
features. By monitoring the performance of the system, you can
identify potential problems before they occur as well as adjust
system resources to provide optimum performance.
Data Subsystem This manual describes the Data Subsystem and its components.
It provides information on how to install, configure, operate and
maintain equipment and software including the Packet Data
Gateway (PDG), Short Data Router (SDR), and Gateway GPRS
Support Node (GGSN) Router. The Data Subsystem performs
registration services for packet data users, maintains user per-
missions and mobility information, and provides routing of traffic
to the radio network and the Gateway GPRS Support Node
(GGSN) Router.
Historical Reports This manual describes Historical Reports which is a Private Ra-
dio Network Management (PRNM) Suite application that allows
you to generate reports for system-wide and individual zone ac-
tivity. These reports display data that is stored on the server.
The Historical Reports application generates reports of statistical
data that is gathered at specific, predefined time intervals.
InfoVista This manual describes InfoVista, which is a customizable per-
formance management application. InfoVista interfaces with,
and gathers data from, multiple network devices supporting Sim-
ple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) including master site
routers, Ethernet LAN switches, and WAN switches. The Info-
Vista client application is used to access server software and

194
 MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

perform administrative tasks such as starting and stopping exist-
ing reports, adding an instance, or creating a new report.
Security Management This manual provides a security overview for the DIMETRA sys-
tem. Attacks on communications networks could interrupt mis-
sion critical operations, compromise classified or restricted infor-
mation, and contribute indirectly to loss of lives. The manual
presents an overview of the security application users, describes
the security groups and applications, and describes how to con-
figure and optimize the applications for secure operation.
Radio User Assignment/Radio This document describes the Radio User Assignment/Radio
User Identity (RUA/RUI) User Identity (RUA/RUI) feature. The purpose of this manual is
to provide a user with a background knowledge on the feature
as well as enable to install, configure and maintain the Alias
Server. It also describes how to operate RUA/RUI from the Alias
Provisioning Client.
MultiCADI This manual describes the Computer Aided Dispatch Interface
(CADI) which is an Application Programming Interface (API) that
provides the capability for systems external to the DIMETRA
SwMI to obtain information about, and exert some control over,
radios. The CADI API enables third parties to write software ap-
plications called CADI clients that can receive events from, and
submit commands to, the DIMETRA SwMI. Multi-Computer Aid-
ed Dispatch Interface (MultiCADI) is a server application and an
API, which enables third parties to develop application programs
that can utilize the facilities provided by the CADI in the DIME-
TRA system. The MultiCADI API builds upon the CADI API, but
provides additional capabilities.
Active Directory This manual describes Active Directory (AD) which is the service
that provides access to enterprise-wide data and improved inte-
gration with the rest of the radio system. The manual contains
procedures for Active Directory installation, configuration and
operation.
TETRA BTS Service Software This manual is an introduction and guide to the DIMETRA BTS
(TESS) User Guide (Base Transceiver System) Service Software. Through the DI-
METRA BTS Service Software, trained service personnel and
system engineers can configure a BTS.
Transport Network Device This manual describes the Transport Network Device Manager
Manager (TNDM) (TNDM), which allows you to deploy previously prepared config-
urations to network devices. It also allows for tasks such as: re-
booting devices, uploading firmware, checking firmware version,
configuration backup and restore, checking device connectivity.
Alphanumeric Text Service This manual describes the Alphanumeric Text Service (ATS) ap-
(ATS) plication, which allows to send text messages between Mobile
Stations (MS), Dispatch Consoles and computers in the fixed
network.
UCS Synchronization Tool This manual describes the User Configuration Server (UCS)
Synchronization Tool, which provides automated inter-cluster
configuration of some of the UCS objects that require to be reg-
istered in all clusters in a multi-cluster system.

195
MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

UCS Configuration Tool This manual describes the User Configuration Server (UCS)
Synchronization Tool, which provides automated intercluster
configuration of some of the UCS objects that require to be reg-
istered in all clusters in a multicluster system.
Enhanced Software Update This manual describes the Enhanced Software Update feature,
User Guide which provides backup and restore functionality, and upgrade
functionality.
Authentication and Encryption This manual gives an overview of the authentication and air in-
Overview terface encryption features in the DIMETRA system. It includes:
• Description of the authentication and air interface encryption
features
• Description of the different aspects of secure encryption key
management
• Procedures for configuring these features in your system

Authentication Overview This manual gives an overview of the authentication features in

the DIMETRA system including:
• Description of the authentication features
• Description of the different aspects of secure encryption key
management
• Procedures for configuring these features in your system

Authentication Centre (AuC) This manual contains the configuration and operation proce-
User Manual dures for the Authentication Centre (AuC). It contains reference
information and detailed descriptions of the GUI.
Clear Authentication Centre This manual contains the configuration and operation proce-
(AuC) User Manual dures for the Clear Authentication Centre (CAuC). It contains
reference information and detailed descriptions of the GUI.
Provisioning Centre (PrC) User This manual describes how to use the Provisioning Centre (PrC)
Manual application. The main functions of the Provisioning Centre are:
• Providing secure (encrypted) storage of subscriber keys
• Providing secure upload and download facilities for subscrib-
er keys and key data
• Displaying up-to-date information about the key status of the
radios
• Exporting K-Ref data to permanent storage media
• Generating audit trail and radio information.

Clear Provisioning Centre This manual describes how to use the Clear Provisioning Centre
(CPrC) User Manual (CPrC) application. The main functions of the Provisioning Cen-
tre are:
• Providing secure storage of subscriber keys
• Providing secure upload and download facilities for subscrib-
er keys and key data
• Displaying up-to-date information about the key status of the
radios

196
 MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

• Exporting K-Ref data to permanent storage media

• Generating audit trail and radio information.

Key Management Facility This manual provides information on hardware, software and
(KMF) system operation, including procedures for installing the Key
Management Facility (KMF) system and for using Over-The-Air-
Key Management (OTAK) and Over-The-Ethernet-Key Manage-
ment (OTEK) commands.
MCC 7500S Dispatch Console This manual describes all necessary actions to configure and
maintain the MCC 7500S console subsystem. The subsystem
allows two-way console and radio to console transmissions to
be encrypted and secure.
MCC 7500S ICCS Gateway This manual describes installation, configuration, operation,
maintenance and troubleshooting of the secure Integrated Com-
mand and Control System (ICCS) gateway, including the Pyra-
mid PC and the multiplexer. The ICCS Gateway Subsystem is a
type of MCC 7500 console site, designed to meet the demands
of customers, who want to implement or already have imple-
mented their own custom-developed Integrated Command and
Control System, that is, a non-Motorola control room. This man-
ual also describes the ICCS Gateway Discreet Listening feature.
CryptR and Audio Module for This manual describes installation, configuration, operation,
Replay maintenance and troubleshooting of Audio Module used for re-
play purposes and configuration of CryptR used for call logging.
Together with the AIS and third party replay devices they are
part of the End-to-End Encryption Call Logging Subsystem.
End-to-End Secure Packet Da- This manual describes configuration and operation of the End-
ta and Short Data Two-End Encryption (E2EE) feature for short and packet data
(SD, PD) on the DIMETRA system.
Network Security This manual describes all necessary actions to install, configure
and maintain the network security feature within the DIMETRA
system. The intention of the manual is to enable the reader to
deploy the best possible level of security, which will protect the
system against viruses, unauthorized authentication or attacks
of hackers. The network security feature provides virus protec-
tion, authentication, and firewall protection.
DIMETRA KVL 4000 AIE and This manual provides instructions for using the KVL 4000 Key
Authentication User Guide Variable Loader to perform Air Interface Encryption and Authen-
tication operations in Motorola DIMETRA systems.
DIMETRA KVL 4000 Authenti- This manual provides instructions for using the KVL 4000 Key
cation User Guide Variable Loader to perform Authentication operations in Motoro-
la DIMETRA systems.
DIMETRA KVL 4000 FLASH- This manual provides instructions for upgrading/reinstalling the
Port Upgrade User Guide KVL application, upgrading the Security Adapter software, and
applying security settings on the KVL.
Dimetra KVL 4000 End-to-End This manual provides instructions for performing initial KVL 4000
Encryption User Guide setup and configuration, using the KVL to create and store en-
cryption keys, talkgroups, and talkgroup sets, and load them into

197
MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

Motorola secure equipment, as well as using the KVL in OTAK
systems.
CryptR Instruction Manual This manual covers hardware installation, main end-user opera-
tions and a proper maintenance of a range of devices based on
the CryptR hardware platform.
MCC 7500-series Console This manual describes the hardware and software components
Sites associated with the MCC 7500-series console sites. It provides
overviews of subsystem functions such as communications with
the Zone Controller, different types of call setups, and descrip-
tions of status and events.
MCC 7500C Dispatch Console This manual describes the hardware and software components
associated with the MCC 7500C Dispatch Console.
MCC 7500 Archiving Interface This manual provides an introduction to the hardware and soft-
Server ware components associated with the MCC 7500 Archiving In-
terface Server. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration
and operation of the server are included.
MCC 7500 Dispatch Communi- This manual describes the MCC 7500 Dispatch Communica-
cations Server tions Server. Detailed procedures for installation, configuration
and operation of the server are included.
MCC 7500 Dispatch Communi- This manual explains how to restore the standalone MCC 7500
cations Server (DCS) Restora- Dispatch Communications Server (DCS) applications, as well as
tion the underlying server platform.
MCC 7500 Discreet Listening This manual describes Discreet Listening, which is a feature that
enables real-time listening into one to one calls involving a spe-
cific radio user. Listening is possible for calls inside the DIME-
TRA system through telephone interconnect to an ordinary tele-
phone. Using the Discreet Listening feature, a user is able to lis-
ten to calls involving the radio user without either of the calling
parties knowing about it. The manual describes both the hard-
ware and software used for the Discreet Listening feature, and
contains procedures how to install, configure, and operate the
feature.
MCC 7500 Analog Convention- This manual provides an introduction to the hardware and soft-
al Operation ware components associated with the analog conventional fea-
ture of the MCC 7500 Dispatch Console.
MCC 7500-series Bandwidth This manual provides an introduction to the bandwidth manage-
Management ment, which is necessary in an MCC 7500-series console sub-
system to ensure efficient transport for the services in your sys-
tem (voice calls, data service and so on).
MCC 7500 Console Interopera- This manual provides a technical overview and troubleshooting
bility information for the interoperability feature. Console interoperabil-
ity is the term for a radio system that supports call traffic involv-
ing both the CENTRACOM Gold Series and Motorola MCC
7500 dispatch consoles.
MCC 7500 Elite Admin Soft- This manual describes the Elite Admin software. The system ad-
ware User Guide ministrator uses the Elite Admin software to set up configura-
tions for the Elite Dispatch desktops that organize resources to
meet specific user needs.

198
 MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

MCC 7500 Elite Dispatch Soft- This manual describes the Elite Dispatch application which ena-
ware User Guide bles console dispatchers to communicate with radio resources.
MCC 7500 Emergency Beacon This manual describes how to install, configure, operate, and
User Guide test an emergency beacon installed on a console.
MCC 7500 Internationalization This manual describes how to generate the translated text (ap-
Process User Guide propriate to the target country or region) using the Internationali-
zation Package. The translated text is generated for the follow-
ing MCC 7500 products:
• Elite Dispatch, Elite Admin, Emergency Beacon, and Discreet
Listening applications.
• Elite Dispatch, Elite Admin, Emergency Beacon, and Discreet
Listening online help files.

Secure Dispatch Communica- This manual describes the Secure Dispatch Communications
tions Server (S-DCS) Server (S-DCS) subsystem. Detailed procedures for installation,
configuration and operation are included.
Secure Dispatch Communica- This manual explains how to restore the Secure Dispatch Com-
tions Server (S-DCS) Subsys- munication Server (S-DCS) subsystem, that is: server applica-
tem Restoration tions and the underlying server platform hardware, CryptR, Au-
dio Processing Entity and Multiplexer.
Service Recovery in Geograph- This manual describes redundancy types of server applications
ical Redundant System and contains instructions how to switch over applications or en-
tire physical servers in a system with Geographical Redundancy
feature.
Object Call This manual provides a detailed description of the Object Call
feature, configuration procedures and troubleshooting informa-
tion.
Centralized Event Logging This manual provides a detailed description of the Centralized
Event Logging feature on Windows and Linux-based clients, as
well as configuration procedures and troubleshooting informa-
tion.
Motorola Inter-System Inter- This manual describes the Motorola Inter-System Interface (M-
face (M-ISI) ISI) feature that allows to connect a DIMETRA system and a for-
eign system.
ISI IP2E1 Converter Server This manual explains how to restore the IP2E1 Converter appli-
Restoration cation and the underlying server platform.
License Manager This manual provides information about the use of licenses to
gain access to features and functions in the DIMETRA system. It
describes the installation of the License Manager application
and explains how to use the web-based License Manager user
interface (UI) to load, view, and manage licenses in the system.
ISI Zone Configuration Manag- This manual describes the Zone Configuration Manager (ZCM)
er application in the ISI cluster. The ISI ZCM is used to configure
certain operational parameters for equipment in an ISI cluster.
ISI User Configuration Manag- This manual describes the User Configuration Manager (UCM)
er application in the ISI cluster. The ISI UCM is used to configure
certain operational parameters for equipment in an ISI cluster.

199
MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

HP ProLiant Gen9 Server Plat- This manual describes how to restore a Gen9 server platform in
form Restoration case of a failure.
Common Server and Client This manual describes how to restore a Gen10 server platform
Platform Restoration in case of a failure. It contains information on replacing the hard-
ware, as well as RAID/BIOS/iLO configuration.
RF Sites
MTS 1: Installation, Configura- This manual describes all necessary actions to install, configure
tion, and Basic Service Manual and maintain the Motorola Transceiver Station 1 (MTS 1) within
the DIMETRA System.
MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4: This manual describes all necessary actions to install, configure
Installation Configuration, Ex- and maintain the Motorola Transceiver Station LiTE, 2 and 4
pansion Option, and Basic (MTS LiTE, MTS 2 and MTS 4) within the DIMETRA System.
Service Manual
MTS Man Machine Interface This manual describes the Man-Machine Interface commands
(MMI) Commands used to test and configure MTS sites.
Online Help
Application Launcher Online This online help describes how to operate the Application
Help Launcher software.
Unified Event Manager (UEM) This online help describes how to operate the Unified Event
Online Help Manager application. It also covers detailed information on all
system alarms and events.
System Health Application This online help describes how to operate the System Health
Suite Online Help Application Suite.
User Configuration Manager This online help describes how to operate the User Configura-
(UCM) Online Help tion Manager application.
Zone Configuration Manager This online help describes how to operate the Zone Configura-
(ZCM) Online Help tion Manager application.
Software Download Online This online help describes how to operate the Software Down-
Help load application.
Radio Control Manager (RCM) This online help describes how to operate the Radio Control
Online Help Manager application.
Historical Reports Online Help This online help describes how to operate the Historical Reports
application.
Authentication Centre Online This online help describes how to operate the Authentication
Help Centre application.
Key Management Facility This online help describes how to operate the Key Management
(KMF) Online Help Facility applications.
BTS Service Software (TESS) This online help describes how to operate the BTS Service Soft-
Online Help ware.
MCC 7500 Elite Dispatch Soft- This online help describes how to operate the MCC 7500 Elite
ware Online Help Dispatch software.
MCC 7500 Elite Admin Soft- This online help describes how to operate MCC 7500 Elite Ad-
ware Online Help min software.

200
 MN005775A01-A
Appendix A: DIMETRA System Documentation

Document Title Description

MCC 7500 Emergency Beacon This online help describes how to operate MCC 7500 Emergen-
Online Help cy Beacon software.
MCC 7500 Discreet Listening This online help describes how to operate the MCC 7500 Dis-
Online Help creet Listening software.

201